Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

С английского на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

second-first

Толкование Перевод

1 εἷς

εἷς, μία, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός a numerical term, ‘one’ (Hom.+)

① a single pers. or thing, with focus on quantitative aspect, one

ⓐ in contrast to more than one

α. adj. μίλιον ἕν Mt 5:41; cp. 20:12; 25:15, 24; Ac 21:7; 28:13; 2 Pt 3:8. Opp. πάντες Ro 5:12 (εἷς ἄνθρωπος as Hippocr., Ep. 11, 2 [IX p. 326]; SHanson, Unity of the Church in the NT, ’46, 65–73 [lit.]). Opp. the nation J 11:50; 18:14 (cp. Oenom. in Eus., PE 5, 25, 5 μεῖον εἶναι ἕνα ἀντι πάντων πεσεῖν τὸν βασιλέα=it is a lesser evil when one, instead of all the citizens, falls, namely, the king).

β. noun, Lk 23:16 (17) v.l. w. partitive gen. (Diod S 1, 91, 5 αὐτῶν εἷς; Jos., Vi. 204; Just., A I, 1, 1 al.) Mt 5:19; 6:29; 18:6; Mk 9:42; Lk 12:27; 15:21 v.l.; 17:2, 22; 23:39; J 19:34 or w. ἐκ (Maximus Tyr. 1, 6 ab ἐκ πολλῶν εἷς; Lucian, Somn. 9; Jos., Bell. 7, 47) Mt 18:12; 22:35; 26:21; Mk 14:18; J 1:40; 6:8; Ac 11:28 al. ὁ εἷς τῶν δώδεκα one of the twelve Mk 14:10 is a peculiar expr. (cp. BGU 1145, 25 [18 B.C.] ὁ εἷς αὐτῶν Ταυρῖνος; UPZ 161, 50; 54; PTebt 138; 357, 10).

ⓑ in contrast to the parts, of which a whole is made up (Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 16 τὰ πολλὰ ἓν γίγνεσθαι; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ὠκεανός: γίγνεται ἐκ δύο εἰς ἕν; Just., D. 103, 5 ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων … ἓν ὄνομα). ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16 (all three Gen 2:24). οἱ πολλοὶ ἓν σῶμά ἐσμεν we, though many, form one body Ro 12:5; cp. 1 Cor 12:12, 20; Eph 2:15. πάντες εἷς ἐστε you are all one Gal 3:28. ἕν εἰσιν 1 Cor 3:8; cp. J 10:30; 17:11, 21–23 (cp. 1QS 5, 2; Just., D. 42, 3 ἓν ὄντες πρᾶγμα). Also εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8 (Appian, Iber. 66 §280 ἐς ἕν=together, as a unity). εἰς ἕν J 11:52 (cp. 1QS 5, 7). ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν who has united the two divisions Eph 2:14.—MAppold, The Oneness Motif (John) ’76.

ⓒ w. negative foll. εἷς … οὐ (μή), stronger than οὐδείς (Aristoph., Eccl. 153, Thesm. 549; X., An. 5, 6, 12; Demosth. 30, 33 ἡ γυνὴ μίαν ἡμέραν οὐκ ἐχήρευσεν; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 18) ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται not one of them will fall Mt 10:29 (Lucian, Herm. 28 ἓν ἐξ ἁπάντων); cp. 5:18; Mk 8:14; Lk 11:46; 12:6. The neg. rarely comes first Mt 5:36.

② a single entity, with focus on uniformity or quality, one

ⓐ one and the same (Pind., N. 6, 1 ἓν ἀνδρῶν, ἓν θεῶν γένος• ἐκ μιᾶς δὲ πνέομεν ἀμφότεροι; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 6; Maximus Tyr. 19, 4a; cp. OGI 383, 59 [I B.C., the ruler’s statue is to be made of the type of stone used for statues of the gods]; Gen 11:1; 40:5; Lev 22:28; Wsd 7:6; Ar. 13, 5 μία φύσις τῶν θεῶν) ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ in one and the same house Lk 12:52 (Diod S 14, 43, 1 ἐν ἑνὶ τόπω). Expressing unanimity ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι w. one voice Ro 15:6; τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου one and the same loaf 1 Cor 10:17; εἷς ὁ θεός one and the same God (Amphitheos of Heracleia: 431 Fgm. 1b Jac. Διόνυσος κ. Σαβάζιος εἷς ἐστι θεός; difft. Ath. 10, 2 ἑνὸς ὄντος τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ) Ro 3:30; cp. 9:10; 1 Cor 6:16f; 12:9, 13. εἷς κύριος, μία πίστις, ἓν βάπτισμα• εἷς θεός κτλ. (cp. the three genders of εἷς consecutively in Simonides 97 Diehl² ἓν πέλαγος, μία ναῦς, εἷς τάφος [of shipwrecked pers.]; Just., D. 63, 5 μιᾷ ψυχῇ … συναγωγῇ … ἐκκλησίᾳ) Eph 4:5f (NJklA 35, 1915, 224ff. The repetition of εἷς is like Herm. Wr. 11, 11; Epict. 3, 24, 10ff).—Rv 9:13; 18:8; Ac 17:26. ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ Phil 1:27; cp. Ac 4:32 (cp. Aristot., EN 9, 8, 2; Plut., Mor. 478c). τὸ ἓν φρονεῖν be of one mind Phil 2:2. συνάγειν εἰς ἕν unite, bring together (Pla., Phileb. 23e; Dionys. Hal. 2, 45, 3 συνάξειν εἰς ἓν τὰ ἔθνη; POxy 1411, 3 τῶν δημοσίων εἰς ἓν συναχθέντων; TestJob 28:5 τὰ χρήματα ἐὰν συναχθῇ εἰς ἓν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό ‘if all [our] valuables were brought together at one place’; Jos., Bell. 3, 518) J 11:52. τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτό one and the same 1 Cor 12:11 (cp. Diod S 11, 47, 3; 17, 104, 6; Epict. 1, 11, 28; 1, 19, 15; Just., D. 123, 1 ἑνὸς καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ … νόμου); cp. ἓν καὶ αὐτό τινι 11:5.—εἰς ἕνα τόπον in a place by itself (Jos., Ant. 6, 125) J 20:7.

ⓑ (a) single, only one (Diod S 16, 11, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 44 §180 εἷς ἀνήρ; Maximus Tyr. 11, 6c μαντεῖον ἕν al.; Just., D. 141, 3 τῆν μίαν τοῦ Δαυεὶδ … παράπτωσιν) λόγον ἕνα Mt 21:24 (GrBar 5:1); Gal 5:14. ἕνα ἄρτον Mk 8:14. εἷς ἄρτος 1 Cor 10:17a (εἷς ἄ. is also the symbol of the unity of the Pythagorean fellowship: Diog. L. 8, 35; here Diog. L. adds that οἱ βάρβαροι hold the same view ἔτι καὶ νῦν). πῆχυν ἕνα Mt 6:27 (s. πῆχυς); ἓν μέλος 1 Cor 12:26; ἓν ἔργον J 7:21 (here, following ἕν, καί adds an indication of the greatness of the accomplishment, as Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 133 §555 ἓν ἐκ τῶν Καίσαρος ἔργων προὔθηκα …, καί). εἷς ἐστιν ὁ ἀγαθός Mt 19:17; ποιῆσαι ἕνα προσήλυτον 23:15; ἕνα εἶχεν υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν he had an only son, whom he loved dearly Mk 12:6 (εἷς υἱ. as Phalaris, Ep. 18). ὁ δὲ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν Gal 3:20; cp. Mk 12:32; 1 Cor 8:4, 6 (v.l. adds to God the Father and Jesus Christ ἓν πνεῦμα ἅγιον κτλ. Cp. also Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a θεὸς εἷς … κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί and as early as Xenophanes, Fgm. 19 Diehl³ εἷς θεὸς ἔν τε θεοῖσι κ. ἀνθρωποῖσι μέγιστος [= Fgm. 23 Diels]); Js 2:19; PtK 3 p. 15, 20 (Herm. Wr. 11, 11; 14 εἷς ὁ θεός; POxy 1382, 20 εἷς Ζεὺς Σάραπις; Sb 159, 1 εἷς θεὸς ὁ βοηθῶν ὑμῶν; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 67; Jos., Ant. 5, 97 θεός τε εἷς; 8, 343, C. Ap. 2, 193; SibOr 4, 30 and Fgm. 1, 7; Ath. 6, 1 μονάς ἐστιν ὁ θεός, τοῦτʼ ἔστιν εἷς; 6, 4 ὁ θεὸς εἷς; s. EPeterson, Εἷς Θεός 1926; D. Monotheismus als polit. Problem ’35; additional reff. Horst, Ps.-Phoc. p. 151f). εἷς ἐστιν ὑμῶν ὁ διδάσκαλος Mt 23:8; cp. vs. 9. μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ a husband married only once (numerous sepulchral ins celebrate the virtue of a surviving spouse by noting that he or she was married only once, thereby suggesting the virtue of extraordinary fidelity, e.g. CIL VI, 3604; 723; 12405; 14404; cp. Horace, Odes 3, 14, 4; Propertius 4, 11, 36; Valerius Maximus 4, 3, 3; and s. esp. CIL VI, 1527, 31670, 37053=ILS 8393 [text and Eng. tr.: EWistrand, The So-Called Laudatio Thuriae, ’76]; s. GWilliams, JRS 48, ’58 16–29. For the use of μία in ref. to a woman: Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 346 D.: ὑπὲρ μιᾶς γυναικός=for only one woman; μία γυνή quite freq.: Diod S 17, 72, 6; cp. 1, 80, 3, where the phrase γαμοῦσι μίαν simply means that the priests married only once, not that they lead a strictly moral life, a concept for which Greeks never use the expression μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ or anything like it; Hippostratus [III B.C.]: 568 Fgm. 1 Jac.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 95 §402; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ: Ath. terms a second marriage εὐπρεπής μοιχεία veiled adultery) 1 Ti 3:2, 12; Tit 1:6; others render husband of one wife (e.g. RSV in later printings; REB). Correspondingly ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς γυνή (cp. the exemplary conduct of Hannah [Anna] Lk 2:36; Paus. 7, 25, 13 the priestess of the earth goddess must be a woman who, before she became a priestess, was not πλέον ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς ἐς πεῖραν ἀφιγμένη) 1 Ti 5:9.—Abs. 1 Cor 9:24; 2 Cor 5:14. μεσίτης ἑνός an intermediary for one alone Gal 3:20; cp. Js 4:12. οὐδὲ εἷς not even a single (X., Mem. 1, 6, 2, Cyr. 1, 3, 10 et al.; Sir 42:20; 49:14 v.l.; 1 Macc 11:70) Mt 27:14; Ac 4:32. Freq. at the end of a sentence or clause (ref. fr. comedy in ESchwartz, NGG 1908, p. 534, 3. Also Hermocles [IV–III B.C.] p. 174, 17 Coll. Alex.; Dio Chrys. 21 [38], 23; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.; 53 p. 617 D.; Epict. 2, 18, 26, Enchir. 1, 3; Philonides in Stob. 3, 35, 6 ed. Hense III p. 688; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 59, 5 [39 A.D.]; Bel 18 Theod.; 1 Macc 7:46) Ro 3:10; οὐδὲ ἕν foll. by ἐὰν μή J 3:27. This is a good reason for placing the period after οὐδὲ ἕν J 1:3 (s. GBergh van Eysinga, PM 13, 1909, 143–50. EHennecke, Congr. d’ Hist. du Christ. I 1928, 207–19; Md’Asbeck, ibid. 220–28; REisler, Revue de Philol. 3 sér. 4, 1930, 350–71; BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6; KAland, ZNW 59, ’68, 174–209; Metzger 195f; γίνομαι 2a), but the lack of inner punctuation in the older mss. validates consideration of alternative punctuation. οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός there is not even one Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:3; Just., D. 103, 2 οὐδὲ μέχρις ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ‘not a single person’). μία εἴσοδος the only entrance Hs 9, 12, 6.—ἕν only one thing: ἔτι ἕν σοι λείπει you still lack only one thing (Jos., Bell. 4, 257) Lk 18:22. ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ you lack only one thing Mk 10:21; cp. Lk 10:42. ἓν οἶδα at least this one thing I know J 9:25. ἓν δὲ τοῦτο this one thing (Porphyr., Vi. Plot. 19; Just., D. 115, 6 ἓν δὲ μικρὸν ὁτιοῦν) 2 Pt 3:8.—ἓν δέ is a short interjectional sentence (like Xenophon Eph. 1, 5, 3 τοσοῦτο δέ•) just one thing! Phil 3:13 (AFridrichsen, ConNeot 9, ’44, 31f).—Gal 5:14 commercial imagery εἷς λόγος (just) one entry, one heading (cp. BGU 831, 13).

ⓒ alone (οὐδεὶς) … εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός Mk 2:7 (in the parallel Lk 5:21 μόνος ὁ θεός, cp. Herm Wr. 11, 11 εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός … εἰ μὴ μόνῳ τῷ θεῷ); 10:18; 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Mt 23:10; Lk 18:19.—EBishop, ET 49, ’38, 363–66.

③ an unspecified entity, some/one=τὶς, whereby εἷς can mean exactly the same thing as the indef. art. (Aristoph. et al. [Av. 1292 εἷς κάπηλος]; Περὶ ὕψους 33, 4 p. 62, 18 V. [the rdg. of cod. Paris], εἷς ἕτερος w. μή ‘for no other reason’; Strabo 5, 3, 2, 230c ἐπηγγείλατο ἕνα ἀγῶνα ἱππικόν; Syntipas p. 29, 3 μία γαλῆ; Appian, Liby. 117 §554 νυκτὸς μιᾶς=one night; Marc. Diac. 27, 5 ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ=on a certain day; SIG 1170, 15 [160 A.D.] μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ; UPZ 162 I, 27 [117 B.C.]; PAmh 30, 28 [II B.C.] Κονδύλου ἑνὸς τῶν ἁλιείων; BGU 1044, 6; Gen 21:15; Jdth 14:6; 1 Esdr 3:5. B-D-F §247, 2; Mlt. 96f; Rob. 674f; Mlt-Turner 195f; EBruhn, RhM 49, 1894, 168–71; JWackernagel, Syntax II² 1928, 151; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 104–6).

ⓐ someone, anyone Mt 18:24; 19:16; Mk 10:17; εἷς ὀνόματι Κλεοπᾶς Lk 24:18. Oft. w. partitive gen. foll. (Alexis 220, 5; Diod S 20, 107, 5 εἷς τῶν φίλων; Epict. 4, 2, 9; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15 εἷς τῶν Σπαρτῶν; TestJob 26:6 μίαν τῶν … γυναικῶν; Jos., Ant. 9, 106) ἕνα τῶν προφητῶν (some) one of the prophets Mt 16:14 (a diminishing term? s. Reader, Polemo p. 257). ἕνα τ. συνδούλων 18:28. ἐν μιᾷ τ. πόλεων Lk 5:12. ἐν μιᾷ τ. ἡμερῶν on one of the days vs. 17; cp. 15:19, 26; 22:47.

ⓑ as indef. art. (s. at 3 above beg.) εἷς γραμματεύς a scribe Mt 8:19. συκῆν μίαν a fig tree Mt 21:19; cp. 26:69; Mk 12:42. παιδάριον ἕν J 6:9 v.l.; ἑνὸς ἀετοῦ Rv 8:13; cp. 18:21; 19:17; ἄρχων εἷς ἐλθών Mt 9:18. εἷς στέφανος ApcPt 3:10; ἓν σῶμα AcPlCor 2:26.

ⓒ used w. τὶς (Pla., Thu., et al.; Jdth 2:13) εἷς τις νεανίσκος a certain young man Mk 14:51 v.l. W. partitive gen. foll. (Trypho Alex. [I B.C.] in Athen. 3, 78a ἕνα τινὰ τ. Τιτάνων; Aesop, Fab. 300 H./30 P. and H-H.; Hierocles 27, 484; IG XII/5, 445, 12 [III B.C.] ἕνα τινὰ αὐτῶν; Ael. Aristid. 29, 14 K.=40 p. 755D.: εἷς τις τ. χορευτῶν) εἷς τις τῶν παρεστηκότων a certain one of the bystanders vs. 47 (on the v.l. without τις s. PDickerson, JBL 116, ’97, 302); also εἷς τις ἐξ αὐτῶν (Jos., Vi. 290) Lk 22:50; J 11:49.

④ marker of someth. that is first, the first

ⓐ perh. Hebraistic (cp. Num 1:1 ἐν μιᾷ τοῦ μηνὸς τ. δευτέρου; 2 Esdr 10:17; Esth 1:1a; Jos., Ant. 1, 29.—But s. also Lydus, Mens. 3, 4 W. τὴν κεφαλὴν τ. χρόνου οἱ Πυθαγόρειοι οὐχὶ πρώτην ἀλλὰ μίαν ὠνόμασαν; Callim., Fgm. 550 P. [482 Schneider] πρὸ μιῆς ὥρης=before the first hour of the day) is its use w. expressions denoting time instead of the ordinal number εἰς μίαν σαββάτων on the first day of the week Mt 28:1; cp. Lk 24:1; Mk 16:2; J 20:1, 19; Ac 20:7; also κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 Cor 16:2 (cp. Just., D. 41, 4 τῇ μίᾳ τῶν σαββάτων ἡμέρᾳ; 27, 5 [here w. πρό and μετά resp., in accordance with Latin usage]).

ⓑ not Semitic (Hdt. 4, 161 μία, ἄλλη, τρίτη; Ael. Aristid. 36, 40 K.=48 p. 453 D.: ἕν, δεύτερον, τρίτον, τέταρτον; JosAs 2:17) εἷς καὶ δεύτερος a first and second Tit 3:10 (cp. Alciphron, Ep. 1, 9, 2; Galen XII 746 K.: ὕδωρ ὄμβριον ἔγχριε μέχρι μιᾶς καὶ δευτέρας ἡμέρας; Maximus Tyr. 28, 2h μίαδευτέρα; EpArist 143; Jos., Ant. 11, 150; 16, 350 πεσόντος ἑνός καὶ δευτέρου). S. also ἡ οὐαὶ ἡ μία Rv 9:12.—ἓν τριάκοντα Mk 4:8, 20 is prob. to be considered an Aramaism thirtyfold (B-D-F §248, 3; EKautzsch, Gramm. d. bibl. Aram. 1884 §66, 2; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f).

⑤ special combinations:

ⓐ εἷς … εἷς (Hom. et al. εἷς μὲν … εἷς δέ: X., Cyr. 1, 2, 4; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 20, 1393a; pap in Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 50, 11 and 13 [III B.C.] ἓν μὲν … ἓν δέ; II/2, 372 V, 14 [II A.D.] ὁ εἷς … ὁ εἷς; POxy 1153, 14 [I A.D.] ἓν μὲν … καὶ ἕν; 2 Km 12:1; Sir 34:23f εἷς … καὶ εἷς; Esth 10:3g δύο, ἕνα τῷ λαῷ … καὶ ἕνα τ. ἔθνεσιν; TestJob 51:3 μιᾶς ὑποσειμιούσης τῇ μιᾷ) (the) one … the other Mt 20:21; 24:40f; 27:38; J 20:12; Gal 4:22; B 7:6f. εἷς τὸν ἕνα one another (=ἀλλήλους) 1 Th 5:11 (cp. Theocr. 22, 65 εἷς ἑνί; TestJob 27:3 εἷς τόν ἕνα κατέρραξαν ‘threw each other to the ground’).

ⓑ εἷς … εἷς … εἷς one … another … a third Mt 17:4 (cp. 1 Km 10:3; 13:17, 18).

ⓒ εἷς ἕκαστος every single, strengthening ἕκαστος, adj. Eph 4:16. Mostly subst.; s. ἕκαστος b.

ⓓ ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἕτερος the one … the other (Aristot., De Rep. Ath. 37, 1; Hyperid. 5, 14f; UPZ 161, 39; 43; 46 [119 B.C.]; PGen 48, 6ff μίαν μὲν … τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν; BGU 194, 15f; Esth 5:1a; TestAbr A 11 p. 88, 29 [Stone p. 24]; Just. D. 49, 2 al.) Mt 6:24; Lk 7:41; 16:13; 17:34f; 18:10 al.; also ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος Rv 17:10.

ⓔ distrib. (1 Ch 24:6 εἷς εἷς; AscIs 3:27 εἷς καὶ εἷς καὶ εἷς ἐν τόποις καὶ τόποις) καθʼ ἕνα, καθʼ ἕν (Hdt., Pla. et al.; 1 Esdr 1:31; 4 Macc 15:12, 14; Jos., Bell. 4, 240, Ant. 12, 191; Ath. 25, 3 καθʼ ἕνα καὶ κατὰ ἔθνη) ITr 12:2; καθʼ ἕνα πάντες all, one by one 1 Cor 14:31 (cp. Ps.-Xenophon, Cyn. 6, 14). ὑμεῖς οἱ καθʼ ἕνα ἕκαστος each one of you Eph 5:33. καθʼ ἕν one after the other (hence τὸ καθʼ ἕν ‘a detailed list’: PLille 11, 8 [III B.C.]; PTebt 47, 34; 332, 16) J 21:25. Also καθʼ ἓν ἕκαστον (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 22, Ages. 7, 1; EpArist 143) Ac 21:19. ἓν καθʼ ἕν (Aesop, Fab. 274 P.; PLeid II, X 1, 22) each one Rv 4:8. In this pass. the second ἕν could be an undeclined nom. as in εἷς κατὰ εἷς (cp. Lucian, Sol. 9; 3 Macc 5:34. Other exx. in W-S. §26, 9; 11 and Wetstein I 627) one after the other Mk 14:19; J 8:9. τὸ καθʼ εἷς opp. οἱ πολλοί individually Ro 12:5; but κατὰ ἕνα = ἕκαστον Hs 9, 3, 5; 9, 6, 3 (B-D-F §305). ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος each one Rv 21:21.

ⓕ ἀπὸ μιᾶς s. ἀπό 6 (as idiom w. noun to be supplied Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 46, 15 [338 A.D.] μίαν ἐκ μιᾶς, i.e. ἡμέραν=day after day).—B. 937; 1007f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἷς
2 μέν

μέν, Particle, used partly to express certainty on the part of the speaker or writer; partly, and more commonly, to point out that the word or clause with which it stands is correlative to another word or clause that is to follow, the latter word or clause being introduced by δέ.

A

I μέν used absolutely to express certainty, not followed by correlative δέ, indeed, of a truth, synonymous with μήν, as appears from the [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. form ἦ μέν in protestations and oaths (where [dialect] Att. used ἦ μήν) , καί μοι ὄμοσσον, ἦ μ. μοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν Il.1.77
, cf. 14.275; ἦ μέν τοι τάδε πάντα τελείεται Od.14.160
, cf. Il.24.416; τοῦτον ἐξορκοῖ, ἦ μέν οἱ διηκονήσειν Hdt.4.154
, cf. 5.93, etc.: with neg., οὐ μὲν γάρ τι κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392
, etc.; ὤμοσα, μὴ μὲν.. ἀναφῆναι 4.254
, cf. Hdt.2.118, 179; ἔξαρνος ἦν, μὴ μὲν ἀποκτεῖναι Id.3.67
, cf. 99: without neg., ἀνδρὸς μὲν τόδε σῆμα πάλαι κατατεθνηῶτος Il.7.89
: also in Trag., ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε τῆς περιρρύτου χθονός S.Ph.1
, cf. 159 (anap.), OC44, E.Med. 676, 1129, etc.; καὶ μέν Il.1.269
, 9.632, etc.; οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδὲ .. 2.703, 12.212; γε μέν, cf. γε 1.5.

2 an answering clause with δέ is sts. implied, τὴν μὲν ἐγὼ σπουδῇ δάμνημ' ἐπέεσσι her can I hardly subdue, [ but all others easily], Il.5.893; ὡς μὲν λέγουσι as indeed they say, [ but as I believe not], E.Or. 8; καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἦν αὐτῷ πόλεμος (with no ἔπειτα δέ to follow), X. An.1.9.14; so νῦν μέν σ' ἀφήσω I will let you go this time, Herod.5.81: to give force to assertions made by a person respecting himself, wherein opposition to other persons is implied, ὡς μὲν ἐμῷ θυμῷ δοκεῖ Od. 13.154
; δοκεῖν μέν μοι ἥξει τήμερον [τὸ πλοῖον] Pl.Cri. 43d: hence with the pers. Pron., ἐγὼ μέν νυν θεοῖσι ἔχω χάριν Hdt.1.71
; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδέν (sc. θέλω) S.Ant. 498; ἐμοῦ μὲν οὐχ ἑκόντος Id.Aj. 455
; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα X.Cyr.1.4.12
, cf. 4.2.45, etc.: with the demonstr. Pron., τούτου μὲν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐγὼ σοφώτερός εἰμι Pl.Ap. 21d
: generally, to emphasize the preceding word, πολλὴ μὲν ἡ μεταβολή μοι γέγονεν great indeed has been the change, Is.1.1, cf. Simon.5.1, etc.

3 μέν is used alone in questions, when the answer is assumed, I take it, θέμις μὲν ἡμᾶς χρησμὸν εἰδέναι θεοῦ; E.Med. 676, cf. Ion 520 (troch.), Hipp. 316, S.Ant. 634, Ar.Av. 1214; Ἕλλην μέν ἐστι καὶ Ἑλληνίζει; Pl.Men. 82b.

II μέν folld. by δέ in the correlative clause or clauses, on the one hand, on the other hand; commonly in Classical Gr., less freq. in later Gr. (rare in NT):

1 μέν.., δέ .. (or when the correlative clause is neg., μέν.., οὐδέ .., Il.1.318, 536), to mark opposition, Hom., etc.—The opposed clauses commonly stand together, but are freq. separated by clauses, parenthetic or explanatory; e.g. μέν in Il.2.494 is answered by δέ in 511, 527 sq.; in X.An.1.9.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by ἐπεὶ δέ in <*> 6; in Id.Mem.1.1.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by θαυμαστὸν δέ in 1.2.1.

2 to connect a series of clauses containing different matter, though with no opposition, Il.1.18sq., 306 sq. (five δέ-clauses), 433 sq. (eight δέ-clauses), cf. X.An. 1.3.14,7.10sq.: freq. when the members of a group or class are distinctly specified, παῖδες δύο, πρεσβύτερος μὲν Ἀρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος ib.1.1.1; τάφρος.., τὸ μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ πέντε, τὸ δὲ βάθος ὀργυιαὶ τρεῖς ib.1.7.14; πρῶτος μέν.., δεύτερος δέ.., τρίτος δέ .. ib.5.6.9; τότε μέν.., τότε δέ .., at one time.., at another.., ib.6.1.9, etc.: esp. with the Art. used as a Pron., ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. ; τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ .., etc.

3 the principal word is freq. repeated, οἳ περὶ μὲν βουλὴν Δαναῶν, περὶ δ' ἐστὲ μάχεσθαι Il.1.258
, cf. 288, Od.15.70; ἔνι μὲν φιλότης, ἐν δ' ἵμερος, ἐν δ' ὀαριστύς Il.14.216
; Ξέρξης μὲν ἄγαγεν.., Ξέρξης δ' ἀπώλεσεν A.Pers. 550
, cf. 560, 694, 700 (all lyr.); χαλεπαίνει μὲν πρῳρεύς, χαλεπαίνει δὲ κυβερνήτης X.An.5.8.20
.

4 one of the correlative clauses is sts. independent, while the other takes the part. or some other dependent form, ἐβλασφήμει κατ' ἐμοῦ.., μάρτυρα μὲν.. οὐδένα παρασχόμενος.., παρεκελεύετο δέ .. D.57.11; οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη X.An.1.10.12
, cf. 2.1.7, 5.6.29; ὧν ἐπιμεμφομένα σ' ἁδεῖα μὲν ἀντία δ' οἴσω S.Tr. 123
, cf. OC 522 (bothlyr.); χωρὶς μὲν τοῦ ἐστερῆσθαι.., ἔτι δὲ καὶ.. δόξω ἀμελῆσαι Pl.Cri.44
b.

5 μέν and δέ freq. oppose two clauses, whereof one is subordinate to the other in meaning or emphasis, ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο θαυμάζω, εἰ Λακεδαιμονίοις μέν ποτε.. ἀντήρατε,.. νυνὶ δὲ ὀκνεῖτ' ἐξιέναι (for εἰ.. ἀντάραντες νυνὶ ὀκνεῖτε) D.2.24, cf. E.IT 116, Lys.34.11, X.Mem.2.7.11, etc.: so in an anacoluthon, τρία μὲν ὄντα.. ναυτικά.., τούτων δ' εἰ περιόψεσθε τὰ δύο, κτλ., Th.1.36.

6 μέν is not always answered by δέ, but freq. by other equiv. Particles, as ἀλλά, Il.1.22 sq., 2.703 sq., Pi.O.9.1, A.Pers. 176, X.An.1.7.17:—by μέντοι, Hdt.1.36, S.Ph. 350, D.21.189, etc.:—by ἀτάρ, Il.6.84, 124, A.Pr. 342, S.OT 1051sq., Pl. Tht. 172c, etc. (so μέν.., αὐτάρ in [dialect] Ep., Il.1.50, Od.19.513, etc.):— by αὖ, Il.11.108, Od.4.210:—by αὖθις, S.Ant. 165:—by αὖτε, Il.1.234, Od.22.5:—by temporal Particles, πρῶτα μέν.., εἶτα .. S.El. 261; πρῶτον μέν.., μετὰ τοῦτο .. X.An.6.1.5-7; μάλιστα μὲν δὴ.., ἔπειτα μέντοι .. S.Ph. 350, cf. OT 647:—rarely by μήν with neg., οὐδὲν μὴν κωλύει Pl.Phdr. 268e
; οὐ μὴν αὐταί γε Id.Phlb. 12d
.

b when the opposition is emphatic, δέ is sts. strengthd., as ὅμως δέ .. S.OT 785, Ph. 473, 1074, etc. (so ἀλλ' ὅμως El. 450
); δ' αὖ .. Il.4.415, X.An.1.10.5; δ' ἔμπης .. Il.1.561-2.

c μέν is sts. answered by a copul. Particle, κάρτιστοι μὲν ἔσαν καὶ καρτίστοις ἐμάχοντο ib. 267, cf. 459, Od. 22.475, S.Aj.1, Tr. 689, E.Med. 125 (anap.), etc.: rarely in Prose, τρία μὲν ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.., καὶ οὐ πρότερον ἐνέδοσαν Th.2.65
(dub.).

B μέν before other Particles:

I where each Particle retains its force,

1 μὲν ἄρα, in Hom. μέν ῥα, Il.2.1, 6.312, Od.1.127, Pl. Phdr. 258d, R. 467d, etc.

2 μὲν γάρ S.OT62
, Th.1.142, etc.:— in Hom. there is freq. no second clause, Od.1.173, 392, cf. S.OT 1062, etc.; μὲν γὰρ δή Il.11.825
; μὲν γάρ τε 17.727
.

3 μέν γε, when a general statement is explained in detail, Κορινθίοις μέν γε ἔνσπονδοί ἐστε Th.1.40
, cf. 70, 6.86, Hdt.6.46, Antipho 5.14, Lys. 13.27, Is.4.8, Ar.Nu. 1382, V. 564, E.Fr.909.4.

4 μὲν δή Il.1.514
, Hdt.1.32, etc.: freq. used to express positive certainty, ἀλλ' οἶσθα μὲν δή S. Tr. 627
, cf. OT 294; τὰ μὲν δὴ τόξ' ἔχεις Id.Ph. 1308
; esp. as a conclusion, τοῦτο μὲν δὴ.. ὁμολογεῖται Pl.Grg. 470b
, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.6, etc.: in closing a statement, τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα A.Pr. 500
, etc.: used in answers to convey full assent, ἦ μὲν δή (cf. supr. A) Il.9.348, Od.4.33; καὶ μὲν δή.. γε Pl.R. 409b
; οὐ μὲν δή, to deny positively, Il.8.238, X.Cyr.1.6.9, Pl.Tht. 148e, etc.; οὐ μὲν δή.. γε X.An.2.2.3
, 3.2.14; ἀλλ' οὔ τι μὲν δή .. Pl.Tht. 187a.

5 μὲν οὖν, v. infr.11.2.

II where the Particles combine so as to form a new sense,

1 μέν γε at all events, at any rate (not in Trag.), τοῦτο μέν γ' ἤδη σαφές Ar.Ach. 154
, cf. Nu. 1172, Lys. 1165, Ra.80, Th.3.39; μέν γέ που Pl.R. 559b
, Tht. 147a.

2 μὲν οὖν is freq. used with a corresponding δέ, so that each Particle retains its force, Od.4.780, Pi.O.1.111, S.OT 244, 843; Ph. 359, D.2.5, etc.: but freq. also abs., so then, S.Ant.65; ταῦτα μὲν οὖν παραλείψω D.2.3
; esp. in replies, sts. in strong affirmation, παντάπασι μὲν οὖν Pl.Tht. 158d
; κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν ib. 159e; πάνυ μὲν οὖν ib. 159b; ἀνάγκη μὲν οὖν ib. 189e; also to substitute a new statement so as to correct a preceding statement, nay rather, κακοδαίμων; Answ. βαρυδαίμων μὲν οὖν! Ar.Ec. 1102; μου πρὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀποψῶ wipe your nose on my head: Answ. ἐμοῦ μὲν οὖν .. nay on mine, Id.Eq. 911, cf. A.Pers. 1032 (lyr.), Ag. 1090 (lyr.), 1396, S.Aj. 1363, El. 1503, OT 705, Ar.Ra. 241, Pl.Cri. 44b, Grg. 466a, 470b, Prt. 309d, etc.; also μὲν οὖν δή S.Tr. 153
; καὶ δὴ μὲν οὖν Id.OC31
; cf. οὐμενοῦν: in NT μενοῦν and μενοῦνγε, to begin a sentence, yea rather, Ev.Luc.11.28, Ep.Rom.9.20, etc., cf. Phryn.322, Hsch.—In [dialect] Ion., μέν νυν is used for μὲν οὖν, Hdt.1.18, 4.145, etc.

3 by μέν τε, if δέ τε follows, the two clauses are more closely combined than by τε.., τε .., Il.5.139, al.; μέν τε is freq. answered by δέ alone, 16.28, al.; by ἀλλά, αὐτάρ, 17.727, Od.1.215, al.; perh. by ἠδέ, Il.4.341:— Hom. also uses μέν τε abs., when τε loses its force, as after ἦ, τίς, etc., Il.2.145, al.

4 μέν τοι in Hom. always occurs in speeches, where τοι can be regarded as the dat. of the Pron.: later, μέντοι is written as a single word, and is used:

a with a conj. force, yet, nevertheless, A.Pr. 320, 1054 (anap.), S.Tr. 413, etc.; and sts. stands for δέ, answering to μέν, v. supr. A.11.6 a.

b as an Adv., in strong protestations, οὐ μέντοι μὰ Δία .. D.4.49; in eager or positive assent, of course, φαμέν τι εἶναι .. ; Answ. φαμὲν μέντοι νὴ Δία Pl.Phd. 65d
, al.: with a neg. to give emphasis to a question, οὐ σὺ μέντοι .. ; why, are you not.. ? Id.Prt. 309a, cf. Phdr. 229b, R. 339b, etc.: sts. to express impatience, ὄμνυμι γάρ σοι—τίνα μέντοι, τίνα θεῶν; Id.Phdr. 236d; τί μ. πρῶτον ἦν, τί πρῶτον ἦν; nay what was the first? Ar.Nu. 787; οὗτος, σὲ λέγω μ. Id.Ra. 171
; σὺ μέντοι .. Luc.Alex.44: with imper., to enforce the command, τουτὶ μ. σὺ φυλάττου only take heed.., Ar. Pax 1100, cf.Av. 661, X.An.1.4.8: in answers, γελοῖον μέντἂν εἴη nay it would be absurd, Pl.Tht. 158e; summing up a long temporal clause, And.1.130.

c μέντοι γε X.Cyr.5.5.24
, etc.; οὐ μ. γε Diog.Apoll.5
: in later Gr. μέντοιγε stands first in the sentence, μ. οὐ θέλω PLond.3.897.13
(i A.D.); also γε μέντοι A.Ag. 938
, S.OT 778, 1292, E.Hec. 600; ὅμως γε μ. Ar.Ra.61
.

d καὶ μ. καί is used to add a point to be noted, Heraclit.28, Pl.R. 331d; also καί.. μ., νῦν σοι καιρός ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν παιδείαν, καὶ φυλάξασθαι μέντοι .. and of course to take care.., X.An.4.6.15 (v.l.), cf. 1.8.20, Pl.Prt. 339c, Tht. 143a.

e ἀλλὰ μέντοι well, if it comes to that, X.An.4.6.16; well, of course, Pl.R. 331e, etc.; cf. μέντον.

C for μέν after other Particles, see each Particle.

D Position of μέν. Like δέ, it usu. stands as the second word in a sentence. But when a sentence begins with words common to its subordinate clauses, μέν stands second in the first of these clauses, as ἥδε γὰρ γυνὴ δούλη μέν, εἴρηκεν δ' ἐλεύθερον λόγον S.Tr.63
; οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι ἐτάξαντο μέν.., ἡσύχαζον δέ .. Th.4.73, cf. 113, etc. It also attaches itself to words which mark opposition, as πρῶτον μέν, τότε μέν, ἐγὼ μέν, even when these do not stand first: sts. however it precedes them, ὡς μὲν ἐγὼ οἶμαι Pl.Phdr. 228b
; ὡς μέν τινες ἔφασαν X.Cyr.5.2.28
. It generally stands between the Art. and Noun, or the Prep. and its Case: but if special stress is laid on the Noun, this is sts. neglected, as οἱ Τεγεᾶται μὲν ἐπηυλίσαντο, Μαντινῆς δὲ ἀπεχώρησαν Th.4.134
; ἀνὰ τὸ σκοτεινὸν μέν .. Id.3.22; also τῇ σῇ μὲν εὐδαιμονίῃ, τῇ ἐμεωυτοῦ δὲ κακοδαιμονίῃ Hdt. 1.87
.

II μέν is freq. repeated:

1 when, besides the opposition of two main clauses, a subordinate opposition is introduced into the first, ὁ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει, ὑμῶν δέ .. X.An.1.6.9, cf. 5.8.24, Th.8.104, D.18.214, 23.208.

2 in apodosi with the demonstr. Pron. or Adv., τὸν μὲν καλέουσι θέρος, τοῦτον μὲν προσκυνέουσι, τὸν δὲ χειμῶνα .. Hdt.2.121; ὅσοι μὲν δὴ νομοῦ τοῦ Θηβαίου εἰσί, οὗτοι μέν [νυν].. αἶγας θύουσι· ὅσοι δὲ.. νομοῦ τοῦ Μενδησίου εἰσί, οὗτοι δὲ.. ὄϊς θύουσι ib.42, cf.3.108, al.; ὅτε μέν με οἱ ἄρχοντες ἔταττον.., τότε μὲν ἔμενον.., τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος,.. ἐνταῦθα δέ .. Pl.Ap. 28e, cf. Grg. 512a.

3 μέν used absolutely is freq. folld. by a correlative μέν, εἰ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς μὲν.. ποιοῦμεν Id.R. 421a
.

III μέν is sts. omitted (esp. in Poetry) where it is implied in the following δέ, φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων Il.22.157
; ἐλευθεροῦτε πατρίδ', ἐλευθεροῦτε δὲ παῖδας A. Pers. 403
; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. Ar.Nu. 396, Pl.Sph. 221e, Arist.Po. 1447b14, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μέν
3 τε

τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).

A as a Conjunction,

I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669
; δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491
, cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375; τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8
, cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b; λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13
; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7
; ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47
; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3; τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11
(iii B.C.); κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494
, cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times, ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530
, cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives, ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56
, cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.

2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22
; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6
(v. οὔτε 11.4
); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67
; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.

3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.

a τε.. δὲ.. , as κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359
, cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625; ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80
; διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3
; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.

b μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291
-3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.

4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes, τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a
; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c; Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476
; κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5
; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.; δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242
, cf. 253, 262, al.; εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5
; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.; ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11
Def.7; πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18
(iii B.C.); χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13
, 61.1, 3.17.7; ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6
, cf. 3.70.4; ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6
, cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.); καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13
, cf. 2.2.17; ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21
, cf. 24, al.; ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4
, cf. Gem.16.6; χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19
, cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.

II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g. Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7
; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293; ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308
, cf. 327, 338, al.; τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47
; βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35
; ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c
; βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47
; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined, κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181
; μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181
; ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194
; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193; ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24
; χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808
; ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927
; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives, διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168
; ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16
; θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427
; πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42
:—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g. τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249
, and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6, ἄλλως 1.3
.

2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep., σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99
, cf. 1.400, al.; also τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469
, cf. 8.162.

3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.

b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9
; καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44
; καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68
; v. infr. c. 10.

4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80; ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85
; ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100
; τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47
, cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.

5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.

B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands: αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221
; οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147
; θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379
, cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264; ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309
, cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526; ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410
; οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392
; οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464
; ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228
, cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322; ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32
; παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218
; αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294
; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307; τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733
-4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83; ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201
; νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71
; κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592
-4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499; νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265
; σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45
, cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied); ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403
, cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons, ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102
; οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86
; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521; μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410
.

2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g. Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334
; Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156
; δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395
, cf. Il.17.249.

3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:

a the principal clause alone contains τε, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
; ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333
; εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165
-6; ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530
.

b the subordinate clause alone contains τε, λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747
; ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207
; ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117
, cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt., ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221
: it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.

c both clauses contain τε, ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508
-9; εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82
-3.

4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies, ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115
; πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447
, cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105; βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52
, cf. 18.485.

5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160; ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338
, cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332; κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438
; μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152
: similarly in clauses with οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422
; οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160
, cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.

6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608; ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655
; ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582
; αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252
, cf. 24.294; οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120
; δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238
, cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415; οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293
, cf. 14.464; πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217
; οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223
.

7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent, Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259
; Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39
; Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227
, cf. 20.187; νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8
; Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84
: similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects, οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43
, cf. 2.669, Od.5.4; Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319
; Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246
; Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493
; τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203
, cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν) ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467
; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary, οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649
; ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187
; τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105
; σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336
; καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357
, cf. 346.

8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g. Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85
; ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65
, cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ) δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90
, cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305; δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562
; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature, ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142
; ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247
, cf. Od. 6.266; ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521
, cf. Od.14.353.

9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it, κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305
, cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined, ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367
.

10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life, γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358
; τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451
; ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473
, cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358; ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347
.

11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535, ὡς εἴ τε 9.314
, 14.254, etc.

II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing) Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35
, cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has τά πέρ τε 1.74
, ὅκως τε 2.108
codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al., οἷά τε 1.93
codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17
; ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8
(ii B.C.); ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3
(iii B.C.); οἵ τε GDI215.23
(Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962; ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1
; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which) ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5
; οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28
.

C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:

1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats, σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13
; ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362
; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367
, cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106
; σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836
; μέν τε in σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47
, cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204
, cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.

2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions, σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90
, cf. Od.19.486; ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337
; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ') ἐᾶν 16.96
(nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ') ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118
; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.

3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him, ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55
; σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119
, 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187; ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169
; οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52
.

4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference, κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270
; ὥς (= so) τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227
; τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28
; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166; εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83
(s.v.l.); ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317
; νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456
; πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342
; δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466
; ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252
; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ') , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406
; οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248
; οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730
; οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437
, 21.596, cf. 15.709.

5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18; ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203
; ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189
(but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259); ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803
, cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.

6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning, χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244
, cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.

7 ἐπεί τε = ἐπεί ( when) is rare in Hom., ἐπεί τ' ἐνόησε Il.12.393
, cf. ἐπείτε.

8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.

9 in ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276
, it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.

10 Rarer and later uses;

a also, esp. with ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29
, cf. 17.273, Il.23.483; ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9
, cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.); ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1
(iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.); τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74
(ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.

b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word, εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238
, cf. 15.484.

c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.

D Position of τε:

1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317; ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136
, cf. 4.505, 7.295; αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42
codd., cf. 291 (anap.); ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69
; ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6
(iii B.C.); τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a
, cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε, τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41
(lyr.); πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210
; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665
; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.

2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.

E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε
4 δεύτερος

δεύτερος, α, ον (Hom.+) ‘second’

① next to the first in a sequence or series, second. In a numerical sequence: Mt 22:26 of the second of seven brothers; J 4:54 second sign (a similar close in Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 33 §150 τρίτον τόδε ἔργον ἦν); D 2:1. In a series (cp. Just., A I, 13, 3 χριστὸν … ἐν δευτέρᾳ χώρᾳ ἔχοντες =holding Christ in second position [in the Trinity] 60, 7; Ath. 35, 1 τὸ πρότερον … τὸ δεύτερον of two charges made against Christians): Mt 22:39; Mk 12:31; Lk 19:18; 1 Cor 15:47; 2 Pt 3:1; Rv 4:7; 6:3; 16:3; 21:19. δευτέρα (sc. ἐπιστολή) in the subscr. of 2 Th and 2 Ti. Of position: the second sentinel’s post Ac 12:10; the second curtain Hb 9:3; cp. vs. 7. Of that which comes later in time (cp. Just., D. 110, 2 δ. παρουσία) as the second item in a class: Hb 8:7; 10:9; Rv 2:11; 11:14; 20:14; 21:8; 2 Cor 1:15; Tit 3:10; ὥρα δ. Hs 9, 11, 7 (cp. Jos., Vi. 220); φυλακὴ δ. second watch in the night (Arrian, Anab. 6, 25, 5; Jos., Bell. 5, 510) Lk 12:38. δευτέρᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) on the second (day of the month) MPol 21.

② neut. δεύτερον, τὸ δεύτερον used as adv. for the second time (Sappho [POxy 1231 Fgm. 1 col. 1, 11=Campbell p. 64]; Hdt. et al.; Appian to Fronto [I p. 537f Viereck-R.] §6; OGI 82, 7 [III B.C.]; Gen 22:15; Jer 40:1; Jos., Bell. 1, 25, Vi. 389; s. MBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de StJean: RB 54, ’47, 480) δ. εἰσελθεῖν J 3:4; παρὼν τὸ δ. 2 Cor 13:2; δ. εἴρηκαν they said for the second time Rv 19:3. Also ἐκ δευτέρου (Diosc. 5, 41; Galen, CMG VII 159, 15 al.; PTebt 297, 19; PHolm 1, 32; Jon 3:1; Jer 1:13; 1 Macc 9:1; JosAs 14:6; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; Jos., Ant. 6, 94; TestAbr A 7 p. 84, 9f [Stone p. 16]; Ath. 32, 3 [Resch, Agrapha 137] on caution with respect to kissing) Mk 14:72; J 9:24; Ac 11:9; Hb 9:28; 2 Ti subscr.; making πάλιν more definite (Heraclit. Sto. 32 p. 48, 8 ἐκ δευτέρου πάλιν; reversed 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]) Mt 26:42; Ac 10:15; also πάλιν δεύτερον (cp. Herodas 5, 47) J 21:16; ἐν τῷ δ. the second time Ac 7:13 (TestJob 36:6). In enumerations secondly (PTebt 56, 9–11 [II B.C.] εὐχαριστῆσαι πρῶτον μὲν τοῖς θεοῖς, δεύτερον δὲ σῶσαι ψυχάς; Sir 23:23; 2 Macc 14:8; Tat. 40, 1; 42, 1) 1 Cor 12:28; D 1:2; Hm 10, 3, 2. τὸ δ. ἀπώλεσεν the second time he destroyed Jd 5 (NRSV renders ‘afterward’, but this is not to be construed as a difft. mng. for Jude’s use of δ.: in Jude’s pregnant statement the point lies in a contrast between two special moments of display of divine power, one in salvation, and the second in destruction).—DELG. M-M. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δεύτερος
5 πρῳ̃ρα

πρῳ̃ρα

Grammatical information: f.

Meaning: `forepart of a ship, prow, bow' ( μ 230: gen. πρῴρης, attribut. to νηός).

Other forms: Ion. second. πρῴρη after πρύμνη.

Compounds: Often as 2. member, e.g. κυανό-πρῳρος `dark-bowed' (Hom., B.), - πρῴρειος (γ 299, enlargement at verse-end; Risch $ 48 d), -πρώϊρα f. (Simon.241; explanation uncertain, cf. bel.).

Derivatives: πρῴρ-ᾱθε(ν), - ηθε(ν) `from the bow, at the bow' (Pi., Th.); - εύς m. `second-steerman' (X., D., Arist.), also PN (θ 113; Bosshardt 55 a. 121); - άτης m. `id.' (S., X.: πρυμνήτης, κυβερνήτης; Fraenkel Nom. ag. 2, 206) with - ατικός `concerning the prow' (pap., Poll.), - ατεύω `to be second-steerman' (Att., hell.); - ήσια pl. n. `uppermost points on starbord' (EM: πρυμνήσια); ptc. aor. πρῳ ράσαντες κροτήσαντες. ἡ δε μεταφορὰ ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν καὶ τῆς εἰρεσίας H., cf. Men. Sikyon. 421 Kassel.

Origin: IE [Indo-European] [813?] *prō (or *pr̥h₃-)u̯(e)r-i̯h₂ `forepart of a ship'

Etymology: As old ι̯α-deriv. πρῳ̃ρα can be contracted from *πρώϜαρ-ι̯α or *πρώϜερ-ι̯α; cf. on the one hand πίειρα, πέπειρα, on the other χίμαιρα, γέραιρα a.o. Whether in κυανο-πρώϊραν (Simon. 241) an old uncontracted form *πρώειραν is preserved (Hdn. 2, 410), is unclear. The besides to be posited masc. *πρώϜων (cf. πίων, πέπων) can be found in πρών (s.v.). With *πρώ-Ϝων could be equated except for the n-stem Skt. pū́r-va- `the foremost, earlier', Toch. B pär-we `first', OCS prъ-vъ `the first'; on ρω beside Skt. ūr Schwyzer 361 (diff. WP. 2, 38, where in its place the Germ. word for `lord, lady', e.g. Goth. frauja, OHG frouwa is adduced). Details (partly diff.) in Schulze Q. 486f., Bechtel Lex. s.v. πρῶιρα and πρώων, πρών, Hermann Gött. Nachr. 1943, 5. Finally to the great group of προ, s.v. -- Lat. LW [loanword] prōra, prōreta (from Ion. *πρῳρήτης); s. W.-Hofmann s.v.

Page in Frisk: 2,608-609

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > πρῳ̃ρα
6 πρῶτος

πρῶτος

Grammatical information: adj.

Meaning: `foremost, first' (Il.).

Other forms: Dor. Boeot. πρᾶτος.

Compounds: As 1. member very productive, e.g. πρωτό-γονος `first-born' (ep. poet. Il.).

Derivatives: 1. Superlative πρώτ-ιστα (adv.) `first of all', - ιστος (ep. poet. Il.), Dor. (Thera) πράτιστος `the very first' (Seiler Steigerungsformen 105). 2. πρωτ-εῖον n. `first prize, first rank' (Att.); - ειος `of the first rank'. 3. - εύω `to be first' (Att.) with the backformation πρωτεύς adjunct to λαός (Tim. Pers. 248; cf. Wil. ad loc.). Several shortnames, e.g. Πρωτ-εύς m. Seagod (Od. etc.; Bosshardt 128f.), - τέας, - τίων, Πρατ-ίνας, - ύλος etc. (Bechtel Hist. Personennamen 387). -- On Πρω-τεσί-λαος, - λεως (Il. etc.) s. Risch $ 71 a.

Origin: IE [Indo-European] [814] XX [unknown]

Etymology: As with the cardinals (cf. οἶος, εἷς and Kretschmer Einl. 10ff.) deviate also with the ordinals, a. even stronger, the expressions for the singular from one another. In Greek πρῶτος, πρᾶτος as innovation joined the sequence τρίτος, τέταρτος etc.; the initial syllable is explained in diff. ways. Most obvious is to compare, πρῶ-, πρᾶ-(τος) with Lith. pìr-mas, Skt. pū́r-va-, Av. paur-va- as representing a zero grade pr̥̄-, i.e. *pr̥H-; the variation πρω-: πρᾱ- can, if not old (Lejeune BSL 29, 117ff.), be explained as partial adaptation to πρό, πρότερος though it is not clear how this would have come about. DELG says that *pr̥H- can give both πρᾱ- and πρω-, but the first requires *pr̥h₂-, the second *pr̥h₃-, so the two cannot come from the same form. A basis *πρό-ατος, for πρῶτος possible, is not possible for πρᾶτος. Schwyzer 361 and 250 w. lit.; s. also on πρῳ̃ ρα and Pisani Ist. Lomb. 77, 563. Older lit. in Bq. Cf. Beekes Development 214f.

Page in Frisk: 2,609-610

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > πρῶτος
7 παρά

πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.

A beside: hence,

A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:

I of Place, πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744
; παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225
, etc.; παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197
; πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533
, etc.; δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194
; φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190
, cf. 21.173; σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473
; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.

II commonly of Persons,

1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc., ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787
; παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70
, etc.; ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140
. ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13
; ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117
; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10
, Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.; ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5
, etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.; ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20
; σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2
.

2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5; παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3
; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.

3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like , τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290
, 15.158; πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452
; ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76
; εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14
, cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4; ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d
; κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e
: without Verb, ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27
: with Verbs of learning, etc., μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104
, etc.

4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs, πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122
; π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c
, etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26; με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e
.

III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near, πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62
, 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.); τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5
; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.

IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).

B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?

I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319; νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408
; ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565
; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346; π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773
; δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97
, cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.; κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972
; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.

II of persons, beside, πὰρ δὲ οἷ αὐτῷ εἷσε Θεοκλύμενον Od.15.285
; κεῖτο παρὰ μνηστῇ ἀλόχῳ Il.9.556
, cf. 6.246, etc.; παρ' ἀνδράσιν εὐνάζεσθαι Od.5.119
; δαίνυσθαι π. τινί 8.243
; πὰρ δέ οἱ ἑστήκει stood by him, Il.4.367.

2 at one's house or place, with one, μένειν π. τισί 9.427
; θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490
; φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627
; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86; παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15
; καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82
(but παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136
), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612; τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f
; ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382
; τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f
; also, in one's hands, τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6
; ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130
, etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.

3 before, in the presence of, ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154
; before a judge, δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9
; π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160
; π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65
; παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73
; εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13
: hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.

4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.

III Arc., = π. c. gen., from, καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9
(Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).

C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,

I beside, near, by,

II along,

III past, beyond.

I beside, near, by:

1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to, ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347
, cf. 8.220, etc.; βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34
, cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.; ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51
, etc.; φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d
; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.; ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86
; καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17
.

2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406
, cf. 11.577), ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51
, cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.; π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122
; καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28
; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460; ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b
, cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46; παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2
, cf. Pl.Smp. 175c; ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a
, cf. R. 328c; στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c
; τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313
, cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45; τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90
; κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87
; τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140
.ά (v.l. ἐμοί) ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18
, cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3; ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99
, cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.); Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52
; τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3
, cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112; τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42
(1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.

b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.); τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18
(Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13; πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5
(Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.

3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc., βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480
, etc.; τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146
; τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117
, cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.; αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293
, cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.

4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with.., ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e
, cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a; ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265
; ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24
.

b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1; π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a
; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,

c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v. παραβάλλω A.
VII. 2); μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33
; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).

5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.

6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.

b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624; σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24
B.

7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority, δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160
, cf. 7.20, 103; ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23
, cf. 4.6; τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41
; π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14
; φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a
, cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.; εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332
([place name] Halae); προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34
(iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves) πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5
.

8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.); παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35
; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51; παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11
; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466; παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569
; οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6
; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.

b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).

9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.); πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643
; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2); ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28
; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.

10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26; ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31
; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63; π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b
; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2; π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10
.

b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32; ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18
; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101; π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14
([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21; τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26
; ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70
; τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a
.

c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).

d throughout a period of time, π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46
; π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a
; π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10
; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.
δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156
; π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24
; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.

II along, ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558
; βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352
; π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21
; ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193
; π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148
; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835; παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3
; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.

2 strictly according to, without deviating from, εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945
, cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.

III past, beyond, παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145
, cf. Od.3.172, 24.12; βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425
; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.

2 metaph., over and above, in addition to, οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698
; π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a
, cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16; ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e
.

3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29; π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38
.

4 metaph., in transgression or violation of, π. μοῖραν Od.14.509
; π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10
; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.; π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90
, etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14; π. φύσιν Th.6.17
, cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69; π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77
, etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.

5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.); παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71
; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205; π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37
; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.

b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29
), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him), ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258
, cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4; παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33
; παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14
, cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4; δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2
; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5; ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801
([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.

6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies, τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2
(cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5; μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29
, cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.

7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6
, cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.); οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63
, cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224; παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2
, cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.; παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.
; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5; π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2
; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.); π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20
, cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).

8 of a limit of possibility, εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239
; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.

D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies, τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400
; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.

E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).

F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.

G IN COMPOS.,

I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).

II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.

III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.

IV metaph.,

1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.

2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.

3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.

4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά
8 τις

τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.

A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)

A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion. τεῳ Il.16.227
, Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form οὔ τινι Il.17.68
, Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in οὔ τινες Od.6.279
, 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα ( ὅτινα Il.22.450
), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an; θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191
; καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142
; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.

II special usages:

1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one, ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201
, etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.

2 any one concerned, every one, εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382
; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254; ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515
, cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187; ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628
; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77; ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75
; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words, τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65
, Th.6.31, etc.; πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205
, Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.; ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113
, etc.; οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118
. In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85; ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53
, cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.

3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad, ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74
; ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11
: hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron., ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289
, cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.

4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force, φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59
(lyr.); μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8
; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.

5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939; εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13
; τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156
; τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213
; ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71
; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut., οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e
, cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.; ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e
; οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c
.

b τις is sts. opp. to another word, ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221
; τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59
; μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33
(more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT) αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c
; ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9
, cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38; τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30
; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.

6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so, ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9
, cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.

b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7; Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233
, cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288
; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.

7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.

8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144; ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911
; δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83
; τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61
; προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23
; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34; ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111
, cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17
, 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48; τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61
; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.; κόσοι τινές Id.7.234
; πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3
; πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156
; ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58
.

9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.; ποῖός τις S.Ant.42
, OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.; ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2
, al.; εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139
, cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.; τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7
.

10 with the Article,

a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.

b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d
, the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ὁ, ἡ, τό B.1.5
: later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.

c freq. in opposed clauses, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141
, Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.; ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407
; ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15
: pl., οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127
, cf. Th.2.91; οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10
, etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6
; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut., τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40
; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl., τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14
, cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.

d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).

II the neut. τι is used,

a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).

b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.

c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all, ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421
; παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7
, etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365
; οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123
, etc.; ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75
, etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3, πολύς 111.1a
, 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3
; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280; μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234
:—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107; καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28
.

12 τίς τε freq. in Hom., ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33
, 4.141, v. τε B.

13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b; ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62
(s. v.l.).

14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.

b repeated in successive clauses, ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689
; εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944
(where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause, οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21
, cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).

15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις) φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199
, cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.

b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189
(lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις] τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128
; ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14
.--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.

III Accentuation and position of τις:

1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:

a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78; τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.
in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause, πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e
; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.); ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32
; οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5
(v.l. for τὺ).

b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word, τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40
, cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2; τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1
; τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127
; ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6
; ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48
: without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence, πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14
, cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.

2 position:

a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word, ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508
, cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense, ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62
; φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521
.

b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive, τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85
; τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38
; τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90
; ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179
; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.

c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.

d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.

e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but αἴ κά τις Epich.35
, 159; αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13
): later [dialect] Dor. εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3
, al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις
9 εὐνουχίζω

εὐνουχίζω (s. prec. and next entry; Clearchus, Fgm. 49; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 98 §409; Lucian, Sat. 12; Archigenes [II A.D.] in Oribas. 8, 2, 8; Galen: CMG V/4/2 p. 334, 8; 335, 4; Cass. Dio 68, 2, 4; Jos., Ant. 10, 33.—Fig., Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 6, 42 p. 252, 27 τὴν γῆν; Just., A I, 15, 4) to cause someone to be a eunuch, castrate, emasculate, make a eunuch of ἑαυτόν oneself Mt 19:12b; pass., 12a. From ancient times it has been disputed whether the word is to be taken literally in both occurrences, fig. in both, or fig. in the first and lit. in the second (s. WBauer, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 235–44). The context requires the fig. interp. (s. εὐνουχία) for the second occurrence, and the lit. for the first (s. JKleist, CBQ 7, ’45, 447–49).—ANock, Eunuchs in Anc. Rel.: ARW 23, 1925, 25–33 (=Essays in Religion and the Anc. World I, ’72, 7–15); LGray, Eunuch: EncRelEth V 579–85; JBlinzler, BRigaux Festschr., ’70, 45–55 (Justin).—DELG s.v. εὐνή. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εὐνουχίζω
10 καί

καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.

① marker of connections, and

ⓐ single words

α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).

β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.

γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.

δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.² χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).

ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.

ⓑ clauses and sentences

α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).

β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.² p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.

γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann⁴-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.

δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.

ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.

ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).

η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.

θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).

ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.

ⓒ oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.

ⓓ After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.

ⓔ introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.

ⓕ καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.

② marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.

ⓐ simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).

ⓑ intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: … even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.

ⓒ In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).

ⓓ w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.

ⓔ after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.

ⓕ used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.

ⓖ used pleonastically w. prep.

α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.

β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).

ⓗ w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.

ⓘ with other particles

α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.

β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.² 35–37.

γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).

δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί
11 ἑαυτοῦ

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ, pl. ἑαυτῶν, reflexive pron. (Hom.+; JosAs 7:6 [oft. cod. A; 3:2 αὐτοῦ]). Editors variously replace contract forms αὑτοῦ and αὑτῶν of later mss. w. uncontracted forms or w. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν; cp., e.g., the texts of Mk 9:16; Lk 23:12; J 2:24; 20:10; Ac 14:17; Ro 1:24; Eph 2:15; Hb 5:3; 1J 5:10; Rv 8:6; 18:7 in GNT^1–3 w. GNT⁴; s. also Merk’s treatment of these same pass. Cp. the ms. evidence for Phil 3:21 in GNT^1–3 w. its absence in GNT⁴. (W-S. §223 16; B-D-F §64, 1; Mayser 305; I²/2, 65; Rob. 226; Mlt-Turner 190; M-M. s.v. αὑτοῦ; RBorger, TRu 52, ’88, 17–19).

① indicator of identity w. the pers. speaking or acting, self

ⓐ of the third pers. sing. and pl. ταπεινοῦν ἑαυτόν humble oneself Mt 18:4; 23:12. Opp. ὑψοῦν ἑ. exalt oneself 23:12; δοξάζειν ἑ. glorify oneself Rv 18:7 v.l. ἀπαρνεῖσθαι ἑ. deny oneself 16:24; Mk 8:34 (Mel, P. 26, 181). ἀμάρτυρον ἑ. ἀφεῖναι leave oneself without witness Ac 14:17 v.l.; ἑτοιμάζειν ἑ. prepare oneself Rv 8:6 v.l. εὐνουχίζειν ἑ. make a eunuch of oneself Mt 19:12; σῴζειν ἑ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 137) 27:42; κατακόπτειν ἑ. beat oneself Mk 5:5; πιστεύειν ἑαυτόν τινι J 2:24 v.l. et al.; ἀγοράζειν τι ἑαυτῷ buy someth. for oneself Mt 14:15; Mk 6:36; θησαυρίζων ἑαυτῷ lay up assets for oneself Lk 12:21. ὑποτάσσειν ἑ. Phil 3:21 v.l. W. the middle (cp. X., Mem. 1, 6, 13 ποιεῖσθαι ἑαυτῷ φίλον; Sir 37:8): διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς they divided among them J 19:24 (Ps 21:19).—The simple dat. may also be used to emphasize the subject as agent (Hdt. 1, 32; Strabo 2, 1, 35; POxy 2351, 49; Ps 26:12; SSol 1:8) βαστάζων ἑαυτῷ τὸν σταυρόν bearing the cross without help J 19:17; ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται they themselves will be responsible for the judgment they are to receive Ro 13:2; οὐκ ἐπαινοῦμεν τοὺς προσιόντας ἑαυτοῖς we do not commend those who take the initiative in advancing themselves MPol 4; cp. στρῶσον σεαυτῷ make your own bed Ac 9:34.—Rydbeck 51–61.—Used esp. w. prep.

α. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (ἀπό 5eα; TestAbr A 19 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8 ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ ἑλόμενος τὸ ἀγαθόν; Tat. 17, 4 ἐχθρὸν ἀμυνεῖται): ποιεῖν τι do someth. of one’s own accord J 5:19. λαλεῖν speak on one’s own authority (Diod S 12, 66, 2 ἐκήρυξέ τις ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; i.e. without orders from a higher authority) 7:18; 16:13; λέγειν 11:51; 18:34 v.l. (M. Ant. 11, 19 τοῦτο οὐκ ἀπὸ σαυτοῦ μέλλεις λέγειν). καρπὸν φέρειν bear fruit by itself 15:4. ἱκανὸν εἶναι be competent by oneself 2 Cor 3:5 (ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν interchanging w. ἐξ ἑαυτῶν; s. also 1aδ). γινώσκειν know by oneself Lk 21:30. κρίνειν judge for oneself 12:57 (ἐξετάζειν Ath. 18, 1).

β. διʼ ἑαυτοῦ (POxy 273, 21; PTebt 72, 197; TestJob 16:4): κοινὸς διʼ ἑαυτοῦ unclean in itself Ro 14:14 (EpJer 26; Just., A I, 54, 8; A II, 10, 8; D. 56, 1).

γ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ to or in oneself, εὐπαρεπέστατον ἦν ἐν αὑτῷ τὸ ὄρος Hs 9, 1, 10. J 13:32 v.l.; Ro 1:24 v.l.; Eph 2:15 v.l. Otherw. mostly w. verbs of speaking, in contrast to audible utterance; s. διαλογίζομαι 1, εἶπον 6, λέγω 1bζ; otherw. ἔχειν τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ have someth. in oneself (cp. Jdth 10:19; Jos., Ant. 8, 171; Just., D. 8, 2; Ath. 10, 2) J 5:26, 42; 6:53; 17:13; 2 Cor 1:9. Gener., of what takes place in the inner consciousness διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17. Esp. γίνεσθαι ἐν ἑαυτῷ come to one’s senses 12:11 (X., An. 1, 5, 17 ὁ Κλέαρχος ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἐγένετο; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11 ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος). Also:

δ. ἐξ ἑαυτῶν (Soph., El. 343 ἐκ σαυτῆς; Theophr. Fgm. 96 [in Ps.-Demetr. 222] ἐξ αὑτοῦ) of (our) own strength 2 Cor 3:5.

ε. εἰς ἑαυτὸν ἔρχεσθαι come to one’s senses Lk 15:17 (Diod S 13, 95, 2; Epict. 3, 1, 15; GrBar 17:3).

ζ. καθʼ ἑαυτόν by oneself (X., Mem. 3, 5, 4; Plut., Anton. 940 [54, 1 and 2]; 2 Macc 13:13; Just., D. 4, 5; 74:2; Ath. 15, 2 al.) μένειν live by oneself (in a private house) Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρά ἐστιν καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith (when it remains) by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Diog. L. 1, 64 from a letter of Solon: religion and lawgivers can do nothing καθʼ ἑαυτά=if they are dependent on themselves alone).—βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθʼ ἑαυτῆς a kingdom that is divided against itself Mt 12:25.—μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ, μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν with oneself, themselves (cp. 1 Km 9:3; 24:3 ἔλαβεν μεθʼ ἑ.) Mt 12:45; 25:3.

η. παρʼ ἑαυτῷ τιθέναι τι put someth. aside 1 Cor 16:2 (X., Mem. 3, 13, 3; cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 68 οἴκαδε παρʼ αὑτῷ; Tat. 7, 2 λόγου δύναμις ἔχουσα παρʼ ἑαυτῇ τὸ προγνωστικόν ‘has in itself’).

θ. περὶ ἑ. προσφέρειν make offering for himself Hb 5:3. τὰ περι ἑαυτοῦ the passages about himself Lk 24:27.

ι. πρὸς ἑαυτὸν προσεύχεσθαι pray to oneself (=in silence) 18:11 (cp. Aristaen., Ep. 1, 6; 2 Macc 11:13; Jos., Ant. 11, 210; Vi. Aesopi G 9 P. πρὸς ἑαυτὸν εἶπεν; 38; Just., D. 62, 2 πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔλεγεν ὁ θεός … πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς λέγομεν). ἀπῆλθεν πρὸς ἑαυτόν, θαυμάζων τὸ γέγονος (Peter) went home, (all the while) marveling at what had taken place Lk 24:12 (FNeirynck, ETL 54, ’78, 104–18). ἀπέρχεσθαι πρὸς ἑαυτούς go home J 20:10 v.l. (for αὐτούς, cp. Polyb. 5, 93, 1; Num 24:25; Jos., Ant. 8, 124; s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 102f). Lk 23:12 v.l.

ⓑ for the first and second pers. pl. (gener. H. Gk.; s. FKälker, Quaest. de elocut. Polyb. 1880, 277; Mlt. 87; B-D-F §64, 1; Mayser 303, w. further lit. in note 3; Rob. 689f) ἑαυτούς = ἡμᾶς αὐτούς (Themistocl., Ep. 15; Jos., Bell. 5, 536; Just., A I, 53, 3; D. 32, 5; 34, 1 al.; Tat. 30, 1; Ath. 12, 1) 1 Cor 11:31. ἐν ἑαυτοῖς = ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς Ro 8:23; 2 Cor 1:9; =ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς Ro 11:25 v.l. (En 6:2 ἐκλεξώμεθα ἑαυτοῖς γυναῖκας). διʼ ἑαυτῶν = διʼ ἡμῶν αὐ. 1 Cl 32:4; παρʼ ἑαυτοῖς = παρʼ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς Ro 11:25 (cp. Just., D. 141, 1 and Tat. 11:2 διʼ ἑαυτούς). ἑαυτοῖς = ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς (cp. En 15:3; TestJob 45:3; TestDan 6:1; Jos., Ant. 4, 190; 8, 277) Mt 23:31; Ro 11:25 v.l.; 1 Cl 47:7.—This replacement of the first and second pers. by the third is very much less common in the sg. (Ps.-Pla., Alc. 2, 143c; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 6 σὺ … αὑτόν; Aelian, VH 1, 21; Galen, Protr. 10 p. 30, 10 John; Syntipas p. 115, 10 μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ=with me; TestJob 2:3 διελογιζόμην ἐν ἑαυτῷ; GrBar 17:3 εἰς ἑαυτὸν ἐλθὼν δόξαν ἔφερον τῷ θεῷ. Transjordanian ins: NGG Phil.-Hist. Kl. Fachgr. V n.s. I/1 ’36, p. 3, 1; other exx. in Mlt. 87, n. 2; Mayser 304; Hauser 100), and can hardly be established w. certainty for the NT gener.: s. J 18:34 v.l.; Ro 13:9 v.l.; cp. ISm 4:2 (v.l. ἐμαυτόν); Hv 4, 1, 5 Joly (ἐμαυτῷ B.); Hs 2:1.

② marker of reciprocal relationship, for the reciprocal pron. ἀλλήλων, ἀλλήλοις, ἀλλήλους (also in earlier auth., Kühner-G. I 573; pap in Mayser 304; LXX; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἔδονται τὰ(ς) σάρκας αὐτῶν καὶ τὸ αἱμα αὐτῶν πίονται; Tat. 3, 3.—W-S. §22, 13; B-D-F §287; Rob. 690) each other, one another συζητεῖν πρὸς ἑαυτούς Mk 9:16 v.l. (s. VTaylor, Comm. ad. loc.; ASyn. app., w. correction of Tdf. app.); λέγοντες πρὸς ἑαυτούς as they said to each other Mk 10:26; cp. J 12:19 (πρὸς ἑ. as Antig. Car. 39 μάχεσθαι πρὸς αὑτούς; Lucian, Philops. 29, Ver. Hist. 1, 35; Tat. 26, 3 πολεμοῦντες … ἑαυτοῖς ἀλλήλους καθαιρεεῖτε). χαρίζεσθαι ἑαυτοῖς forgive one another Eph 4:32; Col 3:13. νουθετεῖν ἑαυτούς admonish one another vs. 16. εἰρηνεύειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς live in peace w. one another 1 Th 5:13; τὴν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς ἀγάπην 1 Pt 4:9.

③ marker of possession by the pers. spoken of or acting, in place of the possessive pron. his, her (Mayser 304f; Mlt. 87f) Mt 8:22; 21:8; 25:1; Lk 2:39; 9:60; 11:21; 12:36 al. ESchwartz, Index lectionum 1905, 8f; DTabachovitz, Eranos 93, ’55, 76ff; ADihle, Noch einmal ἑαυτῷ: Glotta 39, ’60, 83–92; s. Rydbeck (1a beg.).—DELG. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἑαυτοῦ
12 οὐ

οὐ, the negative of

A fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compds. of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, v. infr. G.

A USAGE.

I as the negative of single words,

II as the negative of the sentence.

I οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compd. with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, Il.24.296; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, 2.132, 4.55, al.; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, 1.112, 3.289, al.; οὔ φημι deny, 7.393, 23.668, al. (In most of these uses μή can replace οὐ when the constr. requires it, e.g. εἰ μή φησι ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι Lycurg.34
; but sts. οὐ is retained, εἰ δ' ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν Il.3.289
; εἰ δέ κ'.. ου'κ εἰῶσι 20.139
; ἐὰν οὐ φάσκῃ Lys.13.76
; ἐάντε.. οὐ (v.l. μή) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε Pl. Ap. 25b
):—with Participles: οὐκ ἐθέλων Il.4.224
, 300, 6.165, etc.:— with Adjectives: οὐκ ἀέκοντε 5.366
, 768, al.; οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7
, etc.:— with Adverbs: οὐχ ἥκιστα Id.1.68
, etc.: rarely with Verbal Nouns (v. infr. 11.10).—On the use of οὐ in contrasts, v. infr. B.

II as negativing the whole sentence,

1 οὐ is freq. used alone, sts. with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (sc. ἀποκερῇ) , ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ Pl.Phd. 89b
: sts. as negativing the preceding sentence, Ar. Pax 850, X.HG1.7.19: as a Particle of solemn denial freq. with μά (q. v.) and the acc.; sts. without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον S. OT 660
(lyr.), cf. 1088 (lyr.), El. 1063 (lyr.), Ant. 758.

2 with ind. of statement, τὴν δ' ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω Il.1.29
, cf. 114, 495; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά Pi.P.1.94
; ἔνθα κεν οὔ τιν' ἀδάκρυτόν γ' ἐνόησας Ἀργείων Od.24.61
; οὔ κεν.. ἔπαξε Pi.N.7.25
; οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε Il.8.369
.

3 with subj. in [tense] fut. sense, only in [dialect] Ep., οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται 7.197
; οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίς μῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, cf. 11.387.

4 with opt. in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also [dialect] Ep., ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
, 20.286.

5 with opt. and ἄν, κείνοισι δ' ἂν οὔ τις.. μαχέοιτο 1.271
, cf. 301, 2.250, Hdt. 6.63, A.Pr. 979, S.Aj. 155 (anap.), E.IA 310, Ar.Ach. 403, etc.

6 in dependent clauses οὐ is used,

a with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω.. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι Od.4.377
, cf. S.El. 561, D.2.8, etc.: so with ind. or opt. and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν X.HG5.4.22
, cf. Pl.R. 330a; ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως αὐτοὺς δέχοισθε μαθεῖν χρή Th.1.40
, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.3, etc.: with opt. representing ind. in orat. obliq., ἔλεξε παιδὶ σῷ.. ὡς.. Ἕλληνες οὐ μενοῖεν A.Pers. 358
, cf. S.Ph. 346, Th.1.38, X.HG6.1.1, Pl.Ap. 22b, etc.: for μή in such sentences, v. μή B. 3.

b in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια.. ῥέξε Il.9.534
; ἄχθεται ὅτι οὐ κάρτα θεραπεύεται Hdt.3.80
; διότι οὐκ ἦσαν δίκαι, οὐ δυνατοὶ ἦμεν παρ' αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον πράξασθαι Lys.17.3
; μή με κτεῖν', ἐπεὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός εἰμι Il.21.95
, etc.; νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις.., εἶμι Pl.Prt. 335c
; ἐπειδὴ τὸ χωρίον οὐχ ἡλίσκετο Th.1.102
; νηπιάχοις οἷς οὔ τι μέλει πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il.2.338
, etc.: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν Pl.Cri. 46a
; esp. in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ .., as οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051
, cf. Hec. 298; οὔτις ἔσθ' ὃς οὔ S.Aj. 725
; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ .. Isoc. 15.180.

c after ὥστε with ind. or opt. with ἄν, ὥστ' οὐ δυνατόν σ' εἵργειν ἔσται Ar.V. 384
, cf. S.Aj.98, OT 411; οὕτως αὐτοὺς ἀγαπῶμεν.. ὥστε.. οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσαιμεν Isoc.8.45
; οὐκ ἂν ὡρκίζομεν αὐτὸν ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης ἂν διημαρτήκει καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀμφότερ' εἶχε D.18.30
: ὥστε οὐ with inf. is almost invariably due to orat. obliq., ὥστ' οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) Id.19.308, cf. Th.5.40, 8.76, Lys.18.6, Is.11.27 (cj. Reiske).—Rarely not in orat. obliq., S.El. 780, E. Ph. 1358, Hel. 108, D.53.2,9.48.

7 in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except,

a in Hom., when the εἰ clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indic., εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ' ἐπιπείσεται Il. 15.162
, cf. 178, 20.129, 24.296, Od.2.274, Il.4.160, Od.12.382, 13.144 (9.410 is an exception).

b when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι Isoc.1.44
; κατοικτῖραι.., εἰ.. οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται Hdt.7.46
, cf. S.Aj. 1242; so also δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους ἔχομεν, Ἕλληνας δὲ οὐ τιμωρησόμεθα Hdt.7.9
, cf. And.1.102, Lys.20.8 (prob.), D.8.55;
οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ τὸ μὲν Ἀργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχήν, ὑμεῖς δ' ὄντες Ἀθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον.. φοβήσεσθε
; Id.15.23
, cf. Hdt.5.97, Lys.22.13.

c when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (v. A. I), or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο D.54.29
codd.; εἰ δ' οὐκέτ' ἐστί (sc. ὥσπερ λέγεις)
, τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη
; E. Ion 347
.

8 οὐ is used with inf. in orat. obliq., when it represents the ind. of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι Od.4.664
, cf. Il.17.174, 21.316, S.Ph. 1389, etc.; λέγοντες οὐκ εἶναι αὐτόνομοι Th.1.67
, cf. Pl.R. 348c, X.Cyr.1.6.18; οἶμαι.. οὐκ ὀλίγον ἔργον αὐτὸ εἶναι Pl.R. 369b
, cf. S.OT 1051, Th.1.71, etc.; ἡγήσαντο ἡμᾶς οὐ περιόψεσθαι ib.39. (For the occasional use of μή, v. μή B. 5c; sts. we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ' ἐπιθύνειν χερί S.Ph. 1058s
q.; αὐτὸ ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ.. παρασκευαστόν Pl.Prt. 319b
.)

9 οὐ is used with the part., when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ' ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον E.Hec. 316
; κατενόησαν οὐ πολλοὺς τοὺς Θηβαίους ὄντας Th.2
. 3; ἔργῳ δηλώσω οὐ παραγενόμενος Antipho2.4.8
, etc.; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι Hdt.8.89
; τὴν Μένδην πόλιν ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἀνοιχθεῖσαν διήρπασαν Th.4.130
; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν E.Alc. 352
, cf. S.Ph. 377, etc.: regularly with ὡς and part., ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε Id.El. 1025
, etc.; ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιήσοντες ταῦτα Lys.12.73
, cf. S.Ph. 884, Aj. 682, Hdt.7.99, Th.1.2,5,28,68,90; ὥσπερ οὐ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τεκμηρίῳ χρωμένους Lycurg.90
, cf. Th.8.1, Isoc.4.11:—for exceptions, v. μή B. 6.

b when the part. is used with the Art., μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι Th.1.74
; τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν εἰδότας Id.4.111
; οἱ οὐκ ἐθέλοντες Antipho 6.26
; τῶν οὐ βουλομένων And.1.9
; τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν Lys.12.82
, cf. τὸν οὐδὲ συμπενθῆσαι τὰς τῆς πατρίδος συμφορὰς τολμήσαντα (preceded by τὸν.. μήτε ὅπλα θέμενον ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος μήτε τὸ σῶμα παρασχόντα κτλ.) Lycurg.43; τὸ οὐχ εὑρημένον Pl.R. 427e
.

10 Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (v. μή B. 7
) but οὐ is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις X.Lac.5.4
; τοὺς οὐδένας E.IA 371
; τὸν οὐδέν Id.Ph. 598
(whereas ὁ μηδείς, τὸ μηδέν is the rule); τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, Th.1.137; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις Id.3.95
; ἡ τῶν χωρίων οὐκ ἀπόδοσις Id.5.35
, cf.E. Hipp. 196 (anap.); so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ Id.Ba. 1287
; οὐ πάλης ὕπο ib. 455.

11 for οὐ μή, v. sub voc.

12 in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι ..; Il.10.165; οὐχ ὁράᾳς ..; dost thou not see? Od.17.545;
οὐκ.. ᾐσθόμην
; A.Pr. 956
: so as a strong form of imper.,
οὐκ ἀπαλλάξει
; E. Ion 524
;
οὐκ ἀποκτενεῖτε τὸν μιαρὸν τοῦτον ἄνθρωπον
; Din.1.18
;
οὐκ εἶ καταπιὼν Εὐριπίδην
; Ar.Ach. 484
; βάλλε, βάλλε folld. by οὐ βαλεῖς; οὐ βαλεῖς; ib. 281 and 283, cf. S.Ant. 885: also with opt. and ἄν, οὐκ ἂν δὴ τόνδ' ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο ( = ἔρυσαι) ; Il.5.456; οὐκ ἂν φράσειας ( = φράσον) ; S.Ph. 1222; but in questions introduced by οὐ δή, οὐ δή του, οὔ που, οὔ τί που, a doubt is implied of the statement involved, and an appeal is made to the hearers, οὐ δή ποθ' ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely you are not..? Id.El. 1202, cf. Ph. 900; οὔ τί που οὗτος Ἀπόλλων ..; Pi.P.4.87, cf. S.Ph. 1233, E.IA 670, Hel. 135, Ion 1113, Ar.Ra. 522, 526.

B POSITION. οὐ is generally put immediately before the word which it negatives, οὐκ ἐκεῖνον ἐθεώμην.—ἀλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης X.Cyr.3.1.41
; οὐχ αἱ τρίχες ποιοῦσιν αἱ λευκαὶ φρονεῖν Men.639
; οὐ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀκοντίζειν οὐκ ἔβαλον αὐτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδενὶ ὑπὸ τὸ ἀκόντιον ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.6
: in Poetry the position is freq. more free, κίνδυνος ἄναλκιν οὐ φῶτα λαμβάνει Pi.O.1.81
; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον ib. 4.19; κατακρύπτει δ' οὐ κόνις ib.8.79; χρὴ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Id.P. 2.88
: sts. emphatically at the end of the clause, καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ Id.O.7.48
; ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ S.Aj. 545
: in clauses opposed by μέν and δέ the οὐ (or μή) is freq. placed at the end, βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ' οὔ Th.6.38
; οὗτος δ' ἦν καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ' οὔ X.An.4.4.3
; ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ δοκεῖν μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς.., εἶναι δ' οὔ Pl.Ap. 21c
; so τὸ Πέρσας μὲν λέληθε, ἡμέας μέντοι οὔ Hdt.1.139
: freq. with ὁ μὲν.. ὁ δέ, οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μέν, τὰς δ' οὔ Pl.Cri. 47a
, cf. Ap. 24e, R. 475b, etc.; Λέριοι κακοί, οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ Phoc.1
: sts. in the first clause after μέν, οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ ἐξῆγον μὲν οὔ, συνεκάλεσαν δέ X.An.6.4.20
, cf. 4.8.2, Cyr.1.4.10, Pl.Phd. 73b; κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὒ τὸ στρατόπεδον Hdt.7.208
.

C ACCUMULATION. A simple neg. (οὐ or μή) is freq. repeated in composition with Prons., Advbs., or Conjs., as οὐδείς or μηδείς, οὐδέ or μηδέ, οὐδαμῶς or μηδαμῶς, first in Hom., οὔ μιν ὁΐομαιοὐδὲ πεπύσθαι λυγρῆς ἀγγελίης Il.17.641
; ἀλλ' οὔ μοι Τρώων τόσσον μέλει ἄλγος ὀπίσσω οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος 6.450
; οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον οἰκείου φίλου E.Andr. 986
: the first neg. may be a compd., καθεύδων οὐδεὶς οὐδενὸς ἄξιος οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τοῦ μὴ ζῶντος Pl. Lg. 808b
; οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Id.Prm. 166a
(similarly with μή, Phdr. 236e): or a neg. Adj., ἀδύνατος οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν λέγειν μάτην E.Andr. 746
; οὐ follows the compd. neg., οὐδ' εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ' ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους X. Cyr.2.1.8
; οὐδ' ἂν ἡ πόλις ἄρα ([etym.] ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν ) ὅλη τοιοῦτον ποιῇ, οὐκ ἐπαινέσῃ Pl.R. 426b
, cf. Smp. 204a: sts. a confirmative Particle accompanies the first οὐ or οὐδέ, and the neg. is repeated with emphasis, οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδέ μ' ἔασκες Il.19.295
; οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱὸς.. δὴν ἧν 6.130
, v. οὐδέ C. 11; οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ αὖ ὡς σύ μοι δοκεῖς οἴεσθαι Pl.Prt. 332a
: so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. without any such Particle, οὐ σμικρός, οὔχ, ἁγὼν ὅδε not small, no, is this struggle, S.OC 587; θεοῖς τέθνηκεν οὗτος, οὐ κείνοισιν, οὔ Id.Aj. 970
, cf.Ar.Ra.28, 1308, X.Smp. 2.4, Pl.R. 390c.

2 when the compd. neg. precedes and the simple neg. follows with the Verb, the opposing negs. produce an emphatic positive, οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει Orac. ap. Hdt.5.56; γλώσσης κρυφαῖον οὐδὲν οὐ διέρχεται S.Fr. 935
(but prob. f.l.); οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι X.Smp.1.9
.

3 similarly each of two simple negs. may retain its negating force, ὥσπερ οὐ διὰ πρᾳότητα καὶ ἀσχολίαν τὴν ὑμετέραν οὐ δεδωκὼς ὑμῖν δίκην Lys.6.34
; ἐγὼ δ' οὐκ οἶμαι.. οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι Id.13.52
(similarly with μή, D.19.77): sts. a combination of a μέν- clause with a δέ- clause containing οὐ is negatived as a whole by a preceding οὐ, e.g. οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν δι' ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο Id.18.13
.

D PLEONASM OF οὐ: after Verbs of denying, doubting, and disputing, folld. by ὡς or ὅτι with a finite Verb, οὐ is inserted to show the neg. character of the statement, where in Engl. the neg. is not required, ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῆ ταῦτ' ἐστὶν οὐκ ἔχετ' ἀντιλέγειν D.8.31
, cf. Th.1.77, X.HG2.3.16, Smp.2.12, Isoc.5.57, etc.; οὐδεὶς ἂν τολμήσειεν ἀντειπεῖν ὡς οὐ τὴν μὲν ἐμπειρίαν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἔχομεν Id.6.48
, cf. And.4.34, D.16.4, etc.; οὐκ ἂν ἀρνηθεῖεν ἔνιοι ὡς οὐκ εἰσὶ τοιοῦτοι Id.9.54
; ἀρνεῖσθαι ὅτι οὐ παρῆν X.Ath.2.17
; οὐδ' αὐτὸς ὁ Λάμπις ἔξαρνος ἐγένετο ὡς οὐκ εἴη εἰρηκὼς κτλ. D.34.49; ἀμφισβητεῖν ὡς οὐχὶ.. δοτέον δίκην Pl.Euthphr.8c
, cf. R. 476d, Prm. 135a; ἀπιστεῖν ὅτι οὐ .. Id.Men. 89d; ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαί τισιν ὡς οὐκ ἔσται μεταγνῶναι Th. 3.46
: οὐ is sts. thus used in the second member of a negative comparative sentence, ἥκει ὁ Πέρσης οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ' ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ' ὑμέας Hdt.4.118
, cf. 5.94, 7.16.γ, Th.2.62,3.36: after πλήν, X.Lac. 15.6, D.18.45.

E OMISSION OF οὐ: οὐ is sts. omitted, esp. by Poets, when it may be supplied from the next clause, γῆ δ' οὐδ' ἀὴρ οὐδ' οὐρανὸς ἦν Ar.Av. 694
; σιδήρῳ οὐδ' ἀργύρῳ χρέωνται οὐδέν Hdt.1.215
; ῥοδιακὴ οὖς οὐδὲ πυθμένα οὐκ ἔχουσα Inscr.Délos 313a84
(iii B. C.).

F in Poetry, if ἤ stands before οὐ, the two sounds coalesce into one syllable, as in ἦ οὐχ Il.5.349
, cf. Od.1.298; so, in [dialect] Att., μὴ οὐ S. OT 283
, etc., and ἐγὼ οὔτε ib. 332, ἐγὼ οὐ Ar.Eq. 340
.—This synizesis is general in [dialect] Ep., universal in [dialect] Att.

G FORM. οὐ is used before consonants (including the digamma, e.g. before ἕθεν, οἱ, e(, Il.1.114, 2.392, 24.214, but not before ὅς Possess., οὐχ ᾧ πατρί Od.13.265
, cf. οὐκ ἐπέεσσι Il.15.162
, etc.); οὐκ before vowels with spir. lenis, οὐχ before vowels with spir. asper; in our text of Hdt. οὐκ is used before all vowels (prob. because Hdt. had no spir. asper): the [dialect] Ep. form οὐκί [ῐ] is used by Hom. mostly at the end of a clause and at the close of the verse, ὅς τ' αἴτιος ὅς τε καὶ οὐκί Il.15.137
; ἠὲ καὶ οὐκί 2.238
, 300,al.; but in the middle of a verse, 20.255; οὐχί [ῐ] is found twice in Hom., Il.15.716, 16.762, and is common in Trag., where it is freq. employed like οὔ emphatic (supr. B),
τί δ' οὐχί
; A.Ag. 273
,Fr. 310;
πῶς δ' οὐχί
; Id.Supp. 918
, Ar. Pax 1027; ἐμὸς μὲν οὐχί E.IA 859
: also in Prose, Th.1.120,al., 1 Ep.Cor. 5.12, etc.: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου ( ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr., IG12.10.22, etc.; in iv B.C. rarely written οκ, ib. 22.1635.112,116,121; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid.s.v. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον.

H ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): Arist.SE 166b6, referring to Il.23.328 τὸ μὲν ου (i.e. οὐ = οὒ) καταπύθεται ὄμβρῳ, says λύουσι.. τῇ προσῳδίᾳ λέγοντες τὸ ου ὀξύτερον (i.e. οὗ), cf. 178b3. In codd. the word is written oxytone when folld. by a pause (v. supr. B), and is usu. written without any accent in other cases.

I οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὐ
13 ἄν

ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,

A εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.

A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.

I WITH INDICATIVE:

1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,

a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4
. 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said, εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c; εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.

b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.

c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.

d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.

2 with [tense] fut. ind.:

a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176; ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr., μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.

b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers, σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
; οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313; οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.

II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, al.

III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):

a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition: ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
; οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.

b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e; ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.

c with protasis understood: φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240
, cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85
.

d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.

e in questions, expressing a wish: τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448; πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94
; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.

f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.

g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231
, cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag., θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
; τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.

h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.

IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part., τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:

1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.

b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν) ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., τὸ ἐθέλειν ἂν ἰέναι ἄκλητος ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174b
.

2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.

b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.

3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:

a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.

b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.

4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c
(codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk., νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.

B IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.

I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twice εἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.

2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε ( ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.

3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep., σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
; ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
; ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
; ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a
(where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc. ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.

II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc. εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
), εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.

2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15; ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt., οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.

III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:

1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.: αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat., οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.

2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom., εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.

IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
; ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.); ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.

C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119; εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71; διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.

D GENERAL REMARKS:

I POSITION OF ἄν.

1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, as ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose, ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
; ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: also ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c
.

2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.

3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25; οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48; οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
; οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.

4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause, ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.

II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words, ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244
, cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.

2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.

III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι) , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν) εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.

IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others: πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.

------------------------------------

ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,

A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl., ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50; ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.

------------------------------------

ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.

------------------------------------

ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν
14 πάλιν

πάλιν adv. (Hom.+). On the spelling s. B-D-F §20, end; Mlt-H. 113).

① pert. to return to a position or state, back

ⓐ w. verbs of going, sending, turning, calling etc. πάλιν ἄγειν go back, return J 11:7. ἀναβαίνειν Gal 2:1. ἀναχωρεῖν J 6:15. ἀποστέλλειν send back Mk 11:3. διαπερᾶν 5:21. ἔρχεσθαι (Jos., Ant. 2, 106; 11, 243) Mt 26:43; Mk 11:27; J 4:46; 2 Cor 1:16. ἀπέρχεσθαι Mk 14:39; J 4:3. εἰσέρχεσθαι Mk 2:1 (ParJer 7:22). ἐξέρχεσθαι 7:31 (ParJer 9:12). ἐπιστρέφειν turn back Gal 4:9a. παραγίνεσθαι J 8:2, etc. πάλιν λαβεῖν take back (X., An. 4, 2, 13) 10:17f. παραλαβὼν πάλιν τοὺς δώδεκα he brought the twelve back (after he had been separated fr. them for a time, and had preceded them) Mk 10:32. ἀνεσπάσθη πάλιν ἅπαντα εἰς τ. οὐρανόν everything was drawn back into heaven Ac 11:10.—ἡ ἐμὴ παρουσία πάλιν πρὸς ὑμᾶς my return to you Phil 1:26.—Also pleonastically w. verbs that express the component ‘back’ (Eur., Ep. 1, 1 ἀναπέμπω πάλιν) πάλιν ἀνακάμπτειν (Bacchylides 17, 81f πάλιν ἀνεκάμπτετʼ; Synes., Kingship p. 29b) Ac 18:21. πάλιν ὑποστρέφειν Gal 1:17 (s. B-D-F §484; cp. Rob. 1205).

ⓑ in expressions that denote a falling back into a previous state or a return to a previous activity (TestAbr A 6 p. 89, 13 [Stone p. 14] ἠγέρθη πάλιν ὁ μόσχος; ApcMos 41 πάλιν τὴν ἀνάστασιν ἐπαγγέλομαί σοι; Just., A I, 18, 6; Tat. 11, 2). In Engl. mostly again. εἰ ἃ κατέλυσα ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ Gal 2:18. ἵνα πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε 1 Cor 7:5. διψήσει πάλιν J 4:13. πάλιν εἰς φόβον Ro 8:15. Cp. 11:23; Gal 5:1; Phil 2:28; Hb 5:12; 6:6; 2 Pt 2:20.

② pert. to repetition in the same (or similar) manner, again, once more, anew of someth. a pers. has already done (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 7 [Stone p. 40, 7]; TestJob 15:9; 44:2; JosAs 10:19; ParJer 9:21; Jos., Ant. 12, 109; Just., D. 3, 5 al.), of an event, or of a state or circumstance (Dicaearch., Fgm. 34 W. Pythagoras flees first to Καυλωνία … ἐκεῖθεν δὲ πάλιν εἰς Λοκρούς; ApcEsdr 4:13 κατήγαγόν με … καὶ πάλιν κατήγαγόν με βαθμοὺς τριάκοντα). πάλιν παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διάβολος εἰς ὄρος Mt 4:8 (cp. vs. 5). πάλιν ἐξελθών 20:5 (cp. vs. 3). πότε πάλιν ὄψονται αὐτόν when they would see (Paul) again AcPl Ha 6, 17. ἵνα παρά σου πάλιν ἀκούσωμεν AcPlCor 1:6.—Mt 21:36 (cp. vs. 34); 26:44 (cp. vs. 42), 72; 27:50; Mk 2:13; 3:1; 4:1. πάλιν πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος 8:1 (cp. 6:34).—8:25; 10:1, 24; Lk 23:20 (cp. vs. 13); J 1:35 (cp. vs. 29); 8:8; 20:26; Ac 17:32; Gal 1:9; Phil 4:4; Js 5:18; Hv 3, 1, 5 al.; GJs 17:2; 23:2; AcPl Ha 4, 1.—Somet. w. additions which, in part, define πάλιν more exactly: πάλ. δεύτερον (cp. P. Argentor. Gr. 53, 5: Kl. T. 135 p. 47 τὸ δεύτερον πάλιν) J 21:16. πάλ. ἐκ δευτέρου (Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 14, 31 Jac.; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; PCairMasp 24, 12) Mt 26:42; Ac 10:15. Also pleonastically πάλ. ἄνωθεν Gal 4:9b (s. ἄνωθεν 4). αὖ πάλιν Papias (2:9) (cp. Just., A I, 20, 2). πάλιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς (Mnesimachus Com. [IV B.C.] 4, 24; Diod S 17, 37, 5) B 16:8.—εἰς τὸ πάλιν= πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2 (on this s. WSchmid, Der Attizismus 1887–97, I 167; II 129; III 282; IV 455; 625).

③ marker of a discourse or narrative item added to items of a related nature, also, again, furthermore, thereupon (Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 11, 397a καὶ π. with a series of examples): very oft. in a series of quotations fr. scripture (cp. Diod S 37, 30, 2 καὶ πάλιν … καὶ … followed both times by a poetic quotation; a third one had preceded these. All three deal with riches as the highest good and probably come from a collection of quotations; Ps.-Demetr. c. 184 καὶ πάλιν … καὶ π. with one quotation each. Cp. also Diod S 1, 96, 6; Diog. L. 2, 18; 3, 16; Athen. 4, 17, 140c; 14, 634d; Plut., Mor. 361a καὶ πάλιν … καὶ … ; a quotation follows both times; Just., A I, 35, 5; 38, 2 al.; Ath. 9, 1 al.) J 12:39; 19:37; Ro 15:10–12; 1 Cor 3:20; Hb 1:5; 2:13ab; 4:5; 10:30; 1 Cl 10:4; 15:3f; 16:15; 17:6; 26:3; B 2:7; B 3:1; B 6:2, B 4, B 6, B 14, B 16 and oft. In a series of parables (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 111, 13–34 connects by means of π. two stories that are along the same lines as the Good Samaritan and the Pharisee and the publican; Kephal. I 76, 34; 77, 8 [a series of proverbs]) Lk 13:20 (cp. vs. 18). Also a favorite expr. when a speaker takes up a formula previously used and continues: πάλιν ἠκούσατε Mt 5:33 (cp. vs. 27). πάλιν ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία 13:45 (cp. vs. 44), 47.—18:19 (cp. vs. 18); 19:24 (cp. vs. 23).

④ marker of contrast or an alternative aspect, on the other hand, in turn (Pla., Gorg. 482d; Theocr. 12, 14; Polyb. 10, 9, 1; Diod S 4, 46, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 9; Wsd 13:8; 16:23; 2 Macc 15:39; TestJob 26:4; GrBar 4:15; Just., D. 41, 4 al.) πάλιν γέγραπται on the other hand, it is written Mt 4:7. πάλ. Ἀνδρέας Andrew in turn J 12:22 v.l.—1 Cor 12:21. τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλ. ἐφʼ ἐαυτοῦ let him remind himself, on the other hand 2 Cor 10:7; on the other hand Lk 6:43; 1J 2:8.

⑤ A special difficulty is presented by Mk 15:13, where the first outcry of the crowd is reported w. the words οἱ δὲ πάλιν ἔκραξεν. Is it simply a connective (so δὲ πάλιν Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 22; POxy 1676, 20 ἀλλὰ καὶ λυποῦμαι πάλιν ὅτι ἐκτός μου εἶ)? Is it because a different source is here used? Or is the meaning they shouted back? (so Goodsp.); s. 1a. Or is this really a second outcry, and is the first one hidden behind vs. 8 or 11? Acc. to the parallel Mt 27:21f, which actually mentions several outcries, one after the other, the first one may have been: τὸν Βαραββᾶν. The πάλιν of J 18:40 is also hard to explain (Bultmann 502; 509, 3). Could there be a connection here betw. Mk and J?—Another possibility would be to classify Mk 15:13 and J 18:40 under 4 above, with the meaning in turn (Aristoph., Acharn. 342 et al.; s. L-S-J-M). On a poss. Aram. background s. JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 267f; Mlt-H. 446; Mlt-Turner 229; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 112f.—B. 989. DELG. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πάλιν
15 εἴτε

εἴτε, [dialect] Dor. [full] αἴτε, generally doubled, εἴτε..εἴτε.., Lat.

A sive..sive.., either..or.., whether..or.., so that two cases are put as equally possible or equivalent ; thrice repeated, S.El. 606 ; εἴτ' οὖν.., εἴτε.. Id.OT 1049
; εἴτ' οὖν.., εἴτε καί.. A.Ag. 843
; εἴτ' οὖν.., εἴτ' οὖν.. Id.Ch. 683
; εἴτε.., εἴτ' ἄρ' οὖν.. S.Ph. 345
; εἴτε.., εἴτ' αὖ.. Pl. Phlb. 34b
; εἴτε καί.., εἴτε καί.. Id.R. 471d
: with Substantives, τὴν εἴθ' ἡδονὴν εἴτε ἀπονίαν ἢ εὐστάθειαν Plu.2.1089d
: the first εἴτε is sts. omitted in Poets, ξεῖνος, αἴτ' ὦν ἀστός Pi.P.4.78
; αἰνεῖν, εἴτε με ψέγειν θέλεις A.Ag. 1403
; μύραινά γ', εἴτ' ἔχιδν' ἔφυ Id.Ch. 1002
; λόγοισιν, εἴτ' ἔργοισιν S.OT 517
, cf. Tr. 236 ; and even in Prose, πόλις, εἴτε ἰδιῶται Pl.Lg. 864a
, cf. 907d, Sph. 224e : the first εἴτε is sts. replaced by εἰ, as εἰ..εἴτε.., Lat. utrum..an.., v.l. in Hdt.3.35 ; εἰ.. εἴτε καί.. A.Ch. 768
; εἰ..εἴτε μή Id.Eu. 468
; εἰ μὲν.., εἴτε καὶ μή.. X.Cyr.2.1.7
; sts. ἤ (ἠὲ καί.. v.l. in Il.2.349 ) stands for the second εἴτε, E.El. 896, Pl.Phdr. 277d, IG1.40.5 ; or for the first, S.Aj. 178 (lyr.), E.Alc. 115 (lyr.) ; εἴτε.. εἴτε.., c. subj. (cf. εἰ), v.l. in Archyt. ap Stob.3.1.105.

II in indirect questions, Od.3.90, etc. ; σκοπεῖτε εἴτ' ὀρθῶς λογίζομαι ταῦτ' εἴτε μή D.15.11
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἴτε
16 ποιέω

ποιέω, [dialect] Dor. [full] ποιϝέω IG4.800 ([place name] Troezen), etc.: [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.

A ποίεον Il. 20.147
; [var] contr. ποίει 18.482
; [dialect] Ion. ποιέεσκον Hdt.1.36
, 4.78: [tense] fut. ποιήσω: [tense] aor. ἐποίησα, [dialect] Ep. ποίησα Il.18.490
: [tense] pf. πεποίηκα:—[voice] Med., [dialect] Ion. [tense] impf. ποιεέσκετο Hdt.7.119
: [tense] fut. ποιήσομαι Il.9.397
: in pass. sense, Hp.Decent.11, Arist.Metaph. 1021a23: [tense] aor. ἐποιησάμην, [dialect] Ep. ποι- Od.5.251
, al.: [tense] pf. πεποίημαι in med. sense, And.4.22, Decr. ap. D. 18.29:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ποιηθήσομαι ([etym.] μετα-) D.23.62, v. supr.; πεποιήσομαι Hp.Mul.1.11
,37: [tense] aor. ἐποιήθην Hdt.2.159
, etc. (used as [voice] Med. only in compd. προς-): [tense] pf. πεποίημαι Il.6.56
, etc.:—[dialect] Att. [full] ποῶ (EM 679.24), etc., is guaranteed by metre in Trag. and Com., as ποῶ S. OT 918
, ποεῖν Id.Tr. 385
, ποεῖς Ar.Ach. 410
, etc., and found in cod. Laur. of S., cod. Rav. of Ar., also IG12.39.6 ([etym.] ποήσω), 82.9 ([etym.] ποεῖ), 154.7 ([etym.] ἐποησάτην), etc.; but ποι- is always written before -οι, -ου, -ω in Inscrr.: πο- also in [dialect] Aeol. πόημι πόης πόει PBouriant8.71
,75, Sapph. Supp.1.9, al., and Arc. ποέντω, = ποιούντων, IG5(2).6.9 (Tegea, iv B.C.); cf. ποιητής.

0-0 Used in two general senses, make and do.

A make, produce, first of something material, as manufactures, works of art, etc. (opp. πράττειν, Pl.Chrm. 163b), in Hom. freq. of building, π. δῶμα, τύμβον, Il.1.608,7.435; εἴδωλον Od.4.796
; π. πύλας ἐν [πύργοις] Il.7.339; of smith's work, π. σάκος ib. 222; ἐν [σάκεϊ] ποίει δαίδαλα πολλά 18.482
, cf. 490, 573: freq. in Inscrr. on works of art, Πολυμήδης ἐποίϝηh' (= ἐποίησε ) Ἀργεῖος SIG5
(vi B.C., cf. Class.Phil.20.139); Θεόπροπος ἐποίει Αἰγινάτας SIG18
(vi/v B.C.), etc.; ἐποίησε Τερψικλῆς ib.3b(Milet., vi B.C.), etc.; τίς.. τὴν λίθον ταύτην τέκτων ἐποίει; Herod.4.22
; εἵματα ἀπὸ ξύλων πεποιημένα made from trees, i.e. of cotton, Hdt.7.65; ναὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἀργυρίου X.An. 5.3.9
; πλοῖα ἐκ τῆς ἀκάνθης ποιεύμενα Hdt.2.96
; καρβάτιναι πεποιημέναι ἐκ βοῶν X.An.4.5.14
: c. gen. materiae, πωρίνου λίθου π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.5.62
; ἔρυμα λίθων λογάδην πεποιημένον Th.4.31
; φοίνικος αἱ θύραι πεποιημέναι X.Cyr.7.5.22
: rarely
ποιεῖσθαί τινι
to be made with.., Longus 1.4
; also τῶν τὰ κέρεα.. οἱ πήχεες ποιεῦνται the horns of which are made into the sides of the lyre, Hdt.4.192; also δέρμα εἰς περικεφαλαίας πεποίηται Sch.Patm.D.in BCH1.144:—[voice] Med., make for oneself, as of bees, οἰκία ποιήσωνται build them houses, Il.12.168, cf. 5.735, Od.5.251, 259, Hes.Op. 503; [ῥεῖθρον] π., of a river, Thphr. HP3.1.5; also, have a thing made, get it made, ὀβελούς Hdt.2.135
; στεφάνους οὓς ἐποιησάμην τῷ χορῷ D.21.16
, cf. X.An.5.3.5; τὸν Ἀπόλλω, i.e. a statue of A., Pl.Ep. 361a; αὑτοῦ εἰκόνας Plu. Them.5
, cf. Inscr.Prien.25.9 (iii B.C.?).

2 create, bring into existence, γένος ἀνθρώπων χρύσεον Hes.Op. 110
, cf. Th. 161, 579, etc.;
ὁ ποιῶν
the creator, Pl.Ti. 76c
; ἕτερον Φίλιππον ποιήσετε D.4.11
:—[voice] Med., beget, υἱόν And.1.124
; ἔκ τινος Id.4.22
; παῖδας ποιεῖσθαι, = παιδοποιεῖσθαι, X.Cyr.5.3.19, D.57.43; conceive, παιδίον π. ἔκ τινος Pl.Smp. 203b
:—[voice] Act. in this sense only in later Gr., Plu.2.312a; of the woman, παιδίον ποιῆσαι ib.145d.

3 generally, produce, ὕδωρ π., of Zeus, Ar.V. 261: impers., ἐὰν πλείω ποιῇ ὕδατα, = ἐὰν ὕη, Thphr.CP1.19.3; π. γάλα, of certain kinds of food, Arist.HA 522b32; ἄρρεν π., of an egg, Ael.VH1.15; μέλι ἄριστον π., of Hymettus, Str.9.1.23; π. καρπόν, of trees, Ev.Matt.3.10 (metaph. in religious sense, ib.8); of men, κριθὰς π. grow barley, Ar. Pax 1322; π. σίτου μεδίμνους D.42.20
; π. πενίαν, πλοῦτον, of the stars, Plot.2.3.1.

b Math., make, produce, τομήν, σχῆμα, ὀρθὰς γωνίας, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.16,38, Con.Sph.12; ὁ Α τὸν Γ πολλαπλασιάσας τὸν Η πεποίηκεν Euc.7.19
:—[voice] Pass., πεποιήσθω ὡς.. let it be contrived that.., Archim. Sph.Cyl.2.6.

c postulate, imply, ἡ προσθήκη ἀφαίρεσιν καὶ ἔλλειψιν ποιεῖ Plot.3.9.3
.

d π. τὸ πρόβλημα effect a solution of the problem, Apollon.Perg.Con.2.49,51; π. τὸ ἐπίταγμα fulfil, satisfy the required condition, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.2,3.

4 after Hom., of Poets, compose, write, π. διθύραμβον, ἔπεα, Hdt.1.23, 4.14; π. θεογονίην Ἕλλησι Id.2.53
; π. Φαίδραν, Σατύρους, Ar.Th. 153, 157; π. κωμῳδίαν, τραγῳδίαν, etc., Pl.Smp. 223d; παλινῳδίαν Isoc.10.64
, Pl.Phdr. 243b, etc.; ποιήματα Id.Phd. 60d
: abs., write poetry, write as a poet, ὀρθῶς π. Hdt.3.38
; ἐν τοῖσι ἔπεσι π. Id.4.16
, cf. Pl. Ion 534b: folld. by a quotation, ἐπόησάς ποτε.. Ar.Th. 193
; εἴς τινα Pl.Phd. 61b
; περὶ θεῶν Id.R. 383a
, etc.

b represent in poetry, Ὅμηρον Ἀχιλλέα πεποιηκέναι ἀμείνω Ὀδυσσέως Pl.Hp.Mi. 369c
, cf. 364c, Smp. 174b; ποιήσας τὸν Ἀχιλλέα λέγοντα having represented Achilles saying, Plu.2.105b, cf. 25d, Pl. Grg. 525d, 525e, Arist.Po. 1453b29.

c describe in verse, θεὸν ἐν ἔπεσιν Pl.R. 379a
; ἐποίησα μύθους τοὺς Αἰσώπου put them into verse, Id.Phd. 61b; μῦθον Lycurg.100
.

d invent, καινοὺς θεούς Pl.Euthphr.3b
; ὑπὸ ποιητέω τινὸς ποιηθὲν [τοὔνομα] Hdt.3.115; πεποιημένα ὀνόματα Arist.Rh. 1404b29
, cf.Po. 1457b2; opp. αὐτοφυῆ, κύρια, D.H.Is.7, Pomp. 2.

II bring about, cause, τελευτήν Od.1.250
; γαλήνην 5.452
; φόβον Il.12.432
; σιωπὴν παρὰ πάντων X.HG6.3.10
; τέρψιν τοῖς θεωμένοις Id.Mem.3.10.8
; αἰσχύνην τῇ πόλει Isoc.7.54
, etc.; also of things, ἄνεμοι αὐτοὶ μὲν οὐχ ὁρῶνται· ἃ δὲ ποιοῦσι φανερά X.Mem.4.3.14
; ταὐτὸν ἐποίει αὐτοῖς νικᾶν τε μαχομένοις καὶ μηδὲ μάχεσθαι Th.7.6
, cf. 2.89.

b c. acc. et inf., cause or bring about that.., σε θεοὶ ποίησαν ἱκέσθαι [ἐς] οἶκον Od.23.258
; π. τινὰ κλύειν S.Ph. 926
; π. τινὰ βλέψαι Ar.Pl. 459
, cf. 746; π. τινὰ τριηραρχεῖν Id.Eq. 912
, cf. Av.59; π. τινὰ αἰσχύνεσθαι, κλάειν, ἀπορεῖν, etc., X.Cyr.4.5.48, 2.2.13, Pl.Tht. 149a, etc.: with ὥστε inserted, X.Cyr.3.2.29, Ar.Eq. 351, etc.: folld. by a relat. clause, π. ὅκως ἔσται ἡ Κύπρος ἐλευθέρη Hdt.5.109
, cf. 1.209; ὡς ἂν.. εἰδείην ἐποίουν X.Cyr.6.3.18
:—also [voice] Med., ἐποιήσατο ὡς ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ εἶεν ib.6.1.23.

2 procure, π. ἄδειάν τε καὶ κάθοδόν τινι Th.8.76
; ὁ νόμος π. τὴν κληρονομίαν τισί Is.11.1
; λόγος ἀργύριον τῷ λέγοντι π. gets him money, D.10.76:—[voice] Med., procure for oneself, gain, κλέος αὐτῇ ποιεῖτ' Od.2.126
; ἄδειαν Th.6.60
; τιμωρίαν ἀπό τινων Id.1.25
; τὸν βίον ἀπὸ γεωργίας X.Oec.6.11
, cf. Th.1.5.

3 of sacrifices, festivals, etc., celebrate, π. ἱρά Hdt.9.19
, cf. 2.49 ([voice] Act. and [voice] Pass.); π. τὴν θυσίαν τῷ Ποσειδῶνι X.HG4.5.1
; π. Ἴσθμια ib.4.5.2; τῇ θεῷ ἑορτὴν δημοτελῆ π. Th.2.15
; παννυχίδα π. Pl.R. 328a
; π. σάββατα observe the Sabbath, LXXEx.31.16; π. ταφάς, of a public funeral, Pl. Mx. 234b; π. ἐπαρήν SIG38.30
(Teos, v B.C.); also of political assemblies, π. ἐκκλησίαν Ar.Eq. 746
, Th.1.139; π. μυστήρια Id.6.28
([voice] Pass.); ξύλλογον σφῶν αὐτῶν Id.1.67
:—[voice] Med., ἀγορὴν ποιήσατο Il.8.2
; ἢν θυσίην τις ποιῆται Hdt.6.57
(v.l.); δημοσίᾳ ταφὰς ἐποιήσαντο Th.2.34
; π. ἀγῶνα Id.4.91
; π. ἐκκλησίαν τοῖς Γρᾳξὶ περὶ μισθοῦ Ar.Ach. 169
.

4 of war and peace, πόλεμον π. cause or give rise to a war, πόλεμον ἡμῖν ἀντ' εἰρήνης πρὸς Αακεδαιμονίους π. Is.11.48
; but π. ποιησόμενοι about to make war (on one's own part), X.An.5.5.24; εἰρήνην π. bring about a peace (for others), Ar. Pax 1199; σπονδὰς π. X.An.4.3.14
; ξυμμαχίαν ποιῆσαι Th.2.29
; but εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι make peace (for oneself), And.3.11; σπονδὰς ποιήσασθαι Th.1.28
, etc.:—[voice] Pass., ἐπεποίητο συμμαχίη Hdt.1.77
, etc.

5 freq. in [voice] Med. with Nouns periphr. for the Verb derived from the Noun, μύθου ποιήσασθαι ἐπισχεσίην submit a plea, Od.21.71; ποιέεσθαι ὁδοιπορίην, for ὁδοιπορέειν, Hdt.2.29; π. ὁδόν Id.7.42
, 110, 112, etc.; π. πλόον, for πλέειν, Id.6.95, cf. Antipho 5.21; π. κομιδήν, for κομίζεσθαι, Hdt.6.95; θῶμα π. τὴν ἐργασίην, for θωμάζειν, Id.1.68; ὀργὴν π., for ὀργίζεσθαι, Id.3.25; λήθην π. τι, for λανθάνεσθαί τινος, Id.1.127; βουλὴν π., for βουλεύεσθαι, Id.6.101; συμβολὴν π., for συμβάλλεσθαι, Id.9.45; τὰς μάχας π., for μάχεσθαι, S.El. 302, etc.; καταφυγὴν π., for καταφεύγειν, Antipho 1.4; ἀγῶνα π., for ἀγωνίζεσθαι, Th.2.89; π. λόγον [τινός] make account of.., Hdt.7.156; but τοὺς λόγους π. hold a conference, Th.1.128; also simply for λέγειν, Lys.25.2, cf. Pl.R. 527a, etc.; also π. δι' ἀγγέλου, π. διὰ χρηστηρίων, communicate by a messenger, an oracle, Hdt.6.4, 8.134.

III with Adj. as predic., make, render so and so, ποιῆσαί τινα ἄφρονα make one senseless, Od.23.12; [δῶρα] ὄλβια ποιεῖν make them blest, i.e. prosper them, 13.42, cf. Il.12.30; τοὺς Μήδους ἀσθενεῖς π. X.Cyr.1.5.2
, etc.; χρήσιμον ἐξ ἀχρήστου π. Pl.R. 411b
: with a Subst., ποιῆσαι ἀθύρματα make into playthings, Il. 15.363; ποιεῖν τινα βασιλῆα Od.1.387
; ταμίην ἀνέμων 10.21
; γέροντα 16.456
; ἄκοιτίν τινι Il.24.537
; γαμβρὸν ἑόν Hes.Th. 818
; [μύρμηκας] ἄνδρας π. [καὶ] γυναῖκας Id.Fr.76.5
; πολιήτας π. τινάς Hdt.7.156
; Ἀθηναῖον π. τινά Th.2.29
, etc.; π. τινὰ παράδειγμα Isoc.4.39
: hence, appoint, instal, τὸν Μωϋσῆν καὶ τὸν Ἀαρών LXX 1 Ki.12.6
; δώδεκα Ev.Marc.3.14
:—[voice] Med., ποιεῖσθαί τινα ἑταῖρον make him one's friend, Hes. Op. 707, cf. 714; π. τινὰ ἄλοχον or ἄκοιτιν take her to oneself as wife, Il.3.409, 9.397, cf. Od.5.120, etc.; π. τινὰ παῖδα make him one's son, i.e. adopt him as son, Il.9.495, etc.; θετὸν παῖδα π. adopt a son, Hdt. 6.57: without υἱόν, adopt, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἦσαν αὐτῷ παῖδες ἄρρενες, π. Λεωκράτη D.41.3
, cf. 39.6,33, 44.25, Pl.Lg. 923c, etc.; π. τινὰ θυγατέρα Hdt.4.180
: generally, ἅπαντας ἢ σῦς ἠὲ λύκους π. Od.10.433
; π. τινὰ πολίτην Isoc.9.54
; μαθητήν Pl.Cra. 428b
; τὰ κρέα π. εὔτυκα Hdt. 1.119
; τὰ ἔπεα ἀπόρρητα π. making them a secret, Id.9.45, etc.; also ἑωυτοῦ ποιέεται τὸ.. ἔργον makes it his own, Id.1.129; μηδ' ἃ μὴ 'θιγες ποιοῦ σεαυτῆς S.Ant. 547
.

IV put in a certain place or condition, etc., ἐμοὶ Ζεὺς.. ἐνὶ φρεσὶν ὧδε νόημα ποίησ' Od.14.274
; σφῶϊν ὧδε θεῶν τις ἐνὶ φρεσὶ ποιήσειεν Il.13.55
; αἲ γὰρ τοῦτο θεοὶ ποιήσειαν ἐπὶ νόον νησιώτῃσι Hdt.1.27
, cf. 71; ἐν αἰσχύνῃ π. τὴν πόλιν D.18.136
; τὰς ναῦς ἐπὶ τοῦ ξηροῦ π. Th.1.109
; ἔξω κεφαλὴν π. Hdt.5.33
; ἔξω βελῶν τὴν τάξιν π. X.Cyr.4.1.3
; ἐμαυτὸν ὡς πορρωτάτω π. τῶν ὑποψιῶν Isoc.3.37
; of troops, form them, ὡς ἂν κράτιστα.. X.An.5.2.11
, cf. 3.4.21; in politics, ἐς ὀλίγους τὰς ἀρχὰς π. Th.8.53
; and in war, π. Γετταλίαν ὑπὸ Φιλίππῳ bring it under his power, D.18.48; μήτε τοὺς νόμους μήθ' ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ τοῖς λέγουσι π. Id.58.61
:—[voice] Med., ποιέεσθαι ὑπ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt.1.201
, cf.5.103, etc.; ὑπὸ χεῖρα X.Ages.1.22
; π. τινὰς ἐς φυλακήν, τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων ἐς ἀσφάλειαν, Th.3.3, 8.1; τινὰς ἐς τὸ συμμαχικόν Hdt.9.106
; τὰ λεπτὰ πλοῖα ἐντὸς π. put the small vessels in the middle, Th.2.83, cf. 6.67; π. τινὰ ἐκποδών (v. ἐκποδών) ; ὄπισθεν π. τὸν ποταμόν X.An. 1.10.9
.

2 Math., multiply, π. τὰ ιβ ἐπὶ τὰ έ, τὰ ζ ἐφ' ἑαυτὰ π., Hero Metr.1.8, 2.14.

V [voice] Med., deem, consider, reckon a thing as.., συμφορὴν ποιέεσθαί τι take it for a misfortune, Hdt.1.83, 6.61; δεινὸν π. τι esteem it a grievous thing, take it ill, Id.1.127, etc. (rarely in [voice] Act., δεινὰ π. 2.121
.έ, Th.5.42); μέγα π. c. inf., deem it a great matter that.., Hdt.8.3, cf. 3.42, etc.; μεγάλα π. ὅτι.. Id.1.119
; ἑρμαῖον π. τι count it clear gain, Pl.Grg. 489c; οὐκέτι ἀνασχετὸν π. τι Th.1.118
: freq. with Preps., δι' οὐδενὸς π. deem of no account, S.OC 584; ἐν ἐλαφρῷ, ἐν ὁμοίῳ π., Hdt.1.118,7.138; ἐν σμικρῷ μέρει S.Ph. 498
; ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ Th.4.5
; ἐν ὀργῇ D.1.16
; ἐν νόμῳ π. consider as lawful, Hdt. 1.131; ἐν ἀδείῃ π. consider as safe, Id.9.42; παρ' ὀλίγον π. τι X. An.6.6.11
; περὶ πολλοῦ π., Lat. magni facere, Lys.1.1, etc.; περὶ πλείονος, περὶ πλείστου π., Id.14.40, Pl.Ap. 21e, etc.; περὶ ὀλίγου, περὶ ἐλάττονος, Isoc.17.58, 18.63; περὶ παντός Id.2.15
(rarely πολλοῦ π. τι Pl.Prt. 328d
); πρὸ πολλοῦ π. c. inf., Isoc.5.138.

VI put the case, assume that.., ποιήσας ἀν' ὀγδώκοντα ἄνδρας ἐνεῖναι Hdt.7.184
, cf. 186, X.An.5.7.9: without inf., ἐν ἑκάστῃ ψυχῇ ποιήσωμεν περιστερεῶνά τινα (sc. εἶναι) Pl.Tht. 197d:—[voice] Pass., πεποιήσθω δή be it assumed then, ib.e;
οἱ φιλοσοφώτατοι ποιούμενοι
those who are reputed.., Id.R. 498a
, cf. 538c, 573b:—but for τὸν φιλόσοφον ποιώμεθα νομίζειν ib. 581d read τί οἰώμεθα..;

VII of Time, οὐ π. χρόνον make no long time, i. e. not to delay, D.19.163 codd.; μακρότερον ποιεῖς you are taking too long, PCair.Zen.48.4 (iii B.C.); μέσας π. νύκτας let midnight come, Pl.Phlb. 50d, cf. AP11.85 (Lucill.); ἔξω μέσων νυκτῶν π. τὴν ὥραν put off the time of business to past midnight, D.54.26; τὴν νύκτα ἐφ' ὅπλοις ποιεῖσθαι spend it under arms, Th.7.28(s.v.l.); ποιήσουσιν ἐν πλούτῳ ἔτη πολλά LXXPr.13.23
, cf. To.10.7; δύο ἡμέρας ποιεῖ ἐν τῷ Ἀνουβιείῳ UPZ70.21
(ii B.C.), cf. PSI4.362.15 (iii B.C.); τὰς ἡμέρας ἐν τοῖς ὕδασι π. D.S.1.35
; tarry, stay, μῆνας τρεῖς Act.Ap. 20.3
, cf. AP11.330 (Nicarch.).

VIII in later Greek, sacrifice, μοσχάριον LXXEx.29.36
; καρπώσεις ὑπέρ τινος ib.Jb.42.8: without acc., π. Ἀστάρτῃ sacrifice to Ashtoreth, ib.3 Ki.11.33.

IX make ready, prepare, as food, μοσχάριον ib.Ge.18.7 sq.; π. τὸν μύστακα trim it, ib.2 Ki.19.24(25).

X ποιεῖν βασιλέα play the king, ib.3 Ki.20 (21).7.

B do, much like πράσσω, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν D. 4.5; περὶ ὧν πράττει καὶ μέλλει ποιεῖν Id.8.2
, cf. 18.62; ἄριστα πεποίηται Il.6.56
; πλείονα χρηστὰ περὶ τὴν πόλιν Ar.Eq. 811
; τὰ δίκαια τοῖς εὐεργέταις D.20.12
; ἅμα ἔπος τε καὶ ἔργον ἐποίεε Hdt.3.134
fin.; ποιέειν Σπαρτιητικά act like a Spartan, Id.5.40; οὗτος τί ποιεῖς; A. Supp. 911
, etc.; τὸ προσταχθὲν π. S.Ph. 1010
; π. τὴν μουσικήν practise it, Pl.Phd. 60e, etc.; πᾶν or πάντα π., v. πᾶς D. 111.2, etc.: Math., ὅπερ ἔδει ποιῆσαι, = Q.E.F., Euc.1.1, etc.

2 c. dupl. acc., do something to another, κακά or ἀγαθὰ ποιεῖν τινα, first in Hdt.3.75, al.; ἀγαθόν, κακὸν π. τινά, Isoc.16.50, etc.; μεγάλα τὴν πόλιν ἀγαθά Din.1.17
; also εὖ ποιεῖν τὸν εὖ ποιοῦντα X.Mem.2.3.8
; τὴν ἐκείνου (sc. χώραν) κακῶς π. D.1.18
; in LXX with Prep., π. κακὸν μετά τινων Ge. 26.29
; ταῦτα τοῦτον ἐποίησα Hdt.1.115
; κοὐκ οἶδ' ὅ τι χρῆμά με ποιεῖς Ar.V. 697
, cf. Nu. 259; also of things, ἀργύριον τωὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐποίεε he did this same thing with silver, Hdt.4.166: less freq. c. dat. pers., τῷ τεθνεῶτι μηδὲν τῶν νομιζομένων π. Is.4.19
; ἵππῳ τἀναντία X.Eq.9.12
codd., cf. Ar.Nu. 388, D.29.37: c. dat. rei, τί ποιήσωμεν κιβωτῷ; LXX 1 Ki.5.8
:—in [voice] Med., φίλα ποιέεσθαί τισι Hdt.2.152
,5.37.

3 with an Adv., ὧδε ποίησον do thus, Id.1.112; πῶς ποιήσεις; how will you act? S.OC 652; πῶς δεῖ ποιεῖν περὶ θυσίας X.Mem.1.3.1
; ποίει ὅπως βούλει Id.Cyr.1.4.9
; μὴ ἄλλως π. Pl.R. 328d
; πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους πῶς ποιήσουσιν; ib. 469b; ὀρθῶς π. ib. 403e; εὖ, κακῶς π. τινά, v. supr. 2: freq. c. part., εὖ ἐποίησας ἀπικόμενος Hdt.5.24
, cf. Pl.Phd. 60c; καλῶς ποιεῖς προνοῶν X.Cyr.7.4.13
; οἷον ποιεῖς ἡγούμενος Pl.Chrm. 166c
; καλῶς ποιῶν almost Adverbial, καλῶς γ', ἔφη, ποιῶν σύ Id.Smp. 174e
; καλῶς ποιοῦντες.. πράττετε D.20.110
, cf. 1.28;
εὖ ποιοῦν
fortunately, Id.23.143
.

4 in Prose (rarely in Poetry, A.Pr. 935), used in the second clause, to avoid repeating the Verb of the first, ἐρώτησον αὐτούς· μᾶλλον δ' ἐγὼ τοῦθ' ὑπὲρ σοῦ ποιήσω I will do this for you, D.18.52, cf. 292, Hdt.5.97, Is.7.35.

II abs., to be doing, act, ποιέειν ἢ παθεῖν πρόκειται ἀγών Hdt.7.11
; ποιεῖν, as a category, opp. πάσχειν, Arist.Cat. 2a3, cf. GC 322b11, Ph. 225b13.

b of medicine, operate, be efficacious, Pl.Phd. 117b; λουτρὰ κάλλιστα ποιοῦντα πρὸς νόσους Str. 5.3.6
; πρὸς στραγγουρίαν, πρὸς τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους, Thphr.HP7.14.1, Ps.-Plu.Fluv.16.2: freq. in Dsc., πρὸς ἐπιλημπτικούς 1.6
, al.; εἰς τὰ αὐτά 2.133
: c. dat., στομαχικοῖς Gal.13.183
: abs., ἄκρως π. ib.265; also of charms, PMag.Osl.1.361.

2 Th. has a peculiar usage, ἡ εὔνοια παρὰ πολὺ ἐποίει μᾶλλον ἐς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους good-will made greatly for, on the side of, the L., 2.8: impers., ἐπὶ πολὺ ἐποίει τῆς δόξης τοῖς μὲν ἠπειρώταις εἶναι, τοῖς δέ.. it was the general character of the one to be landsmen, of the others.., 4.12: the former passage is imitated by Arr.An.2.2.3, App.BC1.82, D.C.57.6.

C [voice] Med., = προσποιέομαι, pretend, c. inf., Zos.2.14.1, Procop.Arc. 10. ( ποιϝέω perh. from Ποι-ϝό-ς (in κλινοποιός, νεωποιός, τραπεζοποιός, etc.) 'builder', 'maker', cf. Skt. cinóti, cáyati 'arrange in order', 'build'.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ποιέω
17 σάββατον

σάββατον, ου, τό (שַׁבָּת) dat. pl. σάββασιν (Meleager : Anth. Pal. 5, 160; 1 Macc 2:38; Jos., Vi. 279, Ant. 16, 163; Just., D. 27, 5; 29, 3) always in NT except that a v.l. at Mt 12:1 and 12 acc. to codex B has σαββάτοις (so usu. LXX [Thackeray 35]; Jos., Bell. 1, 146, Ant. 3, 294. See W-S. §8, 12; B-D-F §52; Mlt-H. 128; MBlack, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 60f.—The word is found Plut. et al.; pap, LXX; En 10:17; Philo, Joseph.)

① the seventh day of the week in Israel’s calendar, marked by rest fr. work and by special religious ceremonies, sabbath

ⓐ sing. (τὸ) σάββατον (Nepualius [I A.D.] ed. W Gemoll, Progr. Striegau 1884, 53; LXX; Philo, Cher. 87; Jos., Ant. 3, 143; 255; Just., D. 8, 4 al.) Mt 12:8; Mk 2:27f (Alex. Aphr., Eth. Probl. 10, II 2 p. 130, 34ff ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῶν ἀρετῶν χάριν, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἔμπαλιν [=vice versa]); 6:2; 15:42 v.l.; 16:1; Lk 6:5; 23:54; J 5:9f; 9:14; B 15:1a, 3; GPt 2:5 al. ἁγιάζειν τὸ ς. B 15:1b (s. 2 Esdr 23:22). βεβηλοῦν τὸ ς. Mt 12:5b; λύειν τὸ ς. J 5:18 (s. λύω 4). τηρεῖν τὸ ς. 9:16 (cp. Just., D. 10, 3). σαββατίζειν τὸ ς. (cp. Lev 23:32) Ox 1, 9f (GTh 27) φυλάσσειν τὸ ς. (s. Ex 31:13f; Lev 19:3; Just., D. 8, 4) B 15:2, s. vs. 3. On the Sabbath (s. B-D-F §200, 3; Rob. 523): ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ (2 Esdr 23:15a, 16) Lk 6:7; J 19:31a; ἐν σαββάτῳ (2 Esdr 20:32b) Mt 12:2; Lk 6:1; J 5:16; 7:22f; τῷ σαββάτῳ Lk 6:4 D (Unknown Sayings, 49–54); 6:9; 13:14a, 15; 14:3; τῷ σαββάτῳ ἐπερχομένης τῆς κυριακῆς AcPl Ha 3, 8. σαββάτῳ (Jos., Bell. 2, 456) Mt 24:20 (s. Boll 134, 1); Lk 14:1; J 6:59 v.l.; ἐν ἑτέρῳ ς. Lk 6:6; τῷ ἐρχομένῳ ς. Ac 13:44; ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. (cp. Jer 17:21f) Lk 14:5 v.l.; ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. (2 Esdr 20:32a; 23:15b; cp. Cyranides p. 79, 11 ἐν ἡμ. σαββάτου) Lk 14:5; τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. Lk 13:14b, 16. In the acc. of duration of time (B-D-F §161, 2) τὸ σάββατον throughout the Sabbath Lk 23:56. κατὰ πᾶν ς. (on) every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21; 18:4; εἰς τὸ μεταξὺ ς. on the following Sabbath 13:42. ἡ ἡμέρα πρὸ σαββάτου Lk 23:54 D.—σάββατον μέγα Great Sabbath MPol 8:1; 21:1; cp. J 19:31b (s. ESchwartz, Christl. u. jüd. Ostertafeln: AGG VIII/6, 1905, 127). ς. τὸ λεγόμενον πρῶτον the so-called first Sabbath PtK 2, p. 14, 28.—On σαββάτου ὁδός a Sabbath day’s journey Ac 1:12 s. ὁδός 2.

ⓑ pl.

α. of more than one Sabbath (2 Ch 31:3; Ezk 46; 3; Jos., Ant. 13, 252; Just., D. 10, 3 al.) σάββατα τρία Ac 17:2. B 15:8a (Is 1:13), b.

β. τὰ σάββατα for a single Sabbath day (PCairZen 762, 6 [III B.C.]; Plut., Mor. 169c; 671e τὴν τῶν σαββάτων ἑορτήν; 672a; Ex 20:10; Lev 23:32 al.; Philo, Abr. 28 τὴν ἑβδόμην, ἣν Ἑβραῖοι σάββατα καλοῦσιν; Jos., Ant. 1, 33; 3, 237; 12, 259; 276.—B-D-F §141, 3 ; Rob. 408; ESchwyzer, ZVS 62, ’35, 1–16; ASchlatter, Mt 1929, 393) ὀψὲ σαββάτων Mt 28:1a (s. ὀψέ 3). Also prob. Col 2:16. ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σαββάτων (Ex 20:8; 35:3; Dt 5:12; Jer 17:21f; Jos., Ant. 12, 274; Just., 27, 5) Lk 4:16; Ac 13:14; 16:13; Dg 4:3. (ἐν) τοῖς σάββασιν on the Sabbath (Jos., Vi. 279 τοῖς σάββασιν, Ant. 13, 252 v.l. ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν) Mt 12:1, 5, 10–12; Mk 1:21; 2:23, 24; 3:2, 4; Lk 4:31; 6:2; 13:10. ἡ περὶ τὰ σάββατα δεισιδαιμονία fanatical veneration of the Sabbath Dg 4:1 (only extreme danger to human life can cause the Sabbath law to be suspended: Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162bc). τὰ σάββατα the Sabbath feasts B 2:5 (Is 1:13).—JMeinhold, Sabbat u. Woche im AT 1905, Sabbat u. Sonntag 1909; JHehn, Siebenzahl u. Sabbat bei den Babyloniern u. im AT 1907, Der israelit. Sabbat 1909, Zur Sabbatfrage: BZ 14, 1917, 198–213; EMahler, Der Sabbat: ZDMG 62, 1908, 33–79, Handbuch der jüd. Chronologie 1916; GBeer, Schabbath1908; WNowack, Schabbat 1924; MWolff, Het ordeel der helleensch-romeinsche schrijvers over … den Sabbath: TT 44, 1910, 162–72; ELohse, Jesu Worte über den Sabbat, Beih. ZNW 26, ’60, 79–89; Moore, Judaism s. ind.; Schürer II 424–27; 447–54; 467–75. S. also κυριακός, end.

② a period of seven days, week

ⓐ sing. δὶς τοῦ σαββάτου two days (in) a week Lk 18:12. πρώτῃ σαββάτου on the first day of the week (Sunday) Mk 16:9. κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου every Sunday 1 Cor 16:2. πρωὶ̈ μιᾶς σαββάτου early on Sunday morning Mk 16:2 D.

ⓑ pl. (ἡ) μία (τῶν) σαββάτων (i.e. ἡμέρα) the first day of the week Mt 28:1b (Just., D. 41, 4; s. Dalman, Gramm. 247; SKrauss, Talm. Archäologie II 1911, 428f; PGardner-Smith, JTS 27, 1926, 179–81); Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1; J 20:1, 19; Ac 20:7; 1 Cor 16:2 v.l. Judeans fast δευτέρᾳ σαββάτων καὶ πέμπτῃ on the second and fifth days of the week (Monday and Thursday) D 8:1 (s. νηστεύω and the lit. there).—ESchürer, Die siebentägige Woche im Gebr. der christl. Kirche der ersten Jahrhunderte: ZNW 6, 1905, 1–66; FColson, The Week 1926; FBoll, Hebdomas: Pauly-W. VII/2, 1912, 2547–48; RNorth, The Derivation of ‘Sabbath’, Biblica 36, ’55, 182–201; WRordorf, Sunday, tr. AGraham, ’68; BHHW III 1633–35; TRE III 608.—B. 1005. DELG s.v. σάββατα. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σάββατον
18 ἕτερος

ἕτερος, α, ον (Hom.+; in the NT it is entirely lacking in 1 and 2 Pt; 1, 2, and 3J; Rv; found in Mk only in the bracketed ending 16:12; in J only 19:37) as adj. and subst., gener. ‘other’

① pert. to being distinct from some other item implied or mentioned, other

ⓐ other of two, contrasting a definite person or thing w. another (Appian, Hann. 43 §185 Ἄννων ἕτερος=the other of the two Hannos; of an eye ApcEsdr 4:29; Ath. 17, 4; cp. θάτερος Just., D. 1, 2 al.; Tat. 8, 1 al.) ἐν τῷ ἑτέρῳ πλοίῳ in the other boat Lk 5:7; cp. 23:40. ὁ ἕ. in contrast to ὁ πρῶτος (X., An. 3, 4, 25) Mt 21:30; ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἕ. (s. εἷς 5d) 6:24; Lk 7:41; 16:13; 17:34 f; 18:10; Ac 23:6; 1 Cor 4:6. ἕ. βασιλεύς another king (of two mentioned) Lk 14:31. The usage Hv 3, 8, 4 is colloq., for seven women are referred to; the narrator describes the first two, but anticipates Hermas’ interrupting inquiry about the identity of the other five and therefore treats the first two as a complete series.—1 Cl 38:2.

ⓑ of more than two

α. another ἕ. τῶν μαθητῶν Mt 8:21; cp. Gal 1:19. ἕ. προσδοκῶμεν; are we to look for someone else? Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19 v.l. ἐν ἑ. σαββάτῳ Lk 6:6. ἑτέρα γραφή another Scripture passage J 19:37; 2 Cl 2:4; cp. Lk 9:56, 59, 61; 16:18 (cp. Job 31:10); Ac 1:20 (Ps 108:8); 7:18 (Ex 1:8); Ro 7:3. ἕτερον παράδοξον a further wonder Papias (2:9). ἕ. τις someone else, any other Ac 8:34; Ro 8:39; 13:9 (cp. Cicero, Tusc. 4, 7, 16); 1 Ti 1:10; ἤ τις ἕ. Papias (2:4) (cp. οὐδεὶς ἕ. En 24:4; Just., D. 49, 3).

β. likew. in the pl. ἕτεροι other(s) Ac 2:13 (ἕτεροι δέ joins the opinion of other people to an opinion previously expressed, as schol. on Pind., P. 9, 183), 40; Lk 10:1. ἕτεραι γενεαί other generations (cp. Ps 47:14; 77:4, 6 al.) Eph 3:5. ἑτέρους διδάσκειν (Da 11:4) 2 Ti 2:2. At the end of lists ἕτεροι πολλοί (cp. Demosth. 18, 208 and 219; 19, 297; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 62 §260) Mt 15:30; Ac 15:35; ἕ. πολλαί Lk 8:3; ἕ. πολλά (TestSol 8:9; Jos., Vi. 39; 261) 22:65. πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα 3:18. περὶ ἑτέρων Ac 19:39 v.l. τινὲς ἕ. (Jos., Vi. 15; Ar. 10, 7 ἕτέρων τινῶν) Ac 27:1. ἑπτὰ ἕ. πνεύματα an evil spirit takes seven other evil spirits with it Mt 12:45; Lk 11:26 (cp. TestSol 15:1 ἑτέρας δύο κεφαλάς; TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 24 [Stone p. 76] τῶν ἑτέρων δύο στεφανῶν). Differently, to indicate a difference in kind, καὶ ἕ. (ἑταῖροι P⁷⁵; s. s.v. ἑταῖρος) κακοῦργοι δύο also two others, who were criminals 23:32 (cp. TestJud 9:6; PTebt 41, 9 [c. 119 B.C.] τινῶν ἡμῶν [men] καὶ ἑτέρων γυναικῶν; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 24 ἑτέραν γυναῖκα Σεμίρ.=and in addition, a woman, Semiramis). οἱ ἕ. the others, the rest Mt 11:16; Lk 4:43.

γ. used interchangeably w. ἄλλος, which is felt to be its equivalent (Ps.-Pla., Alcib. I 116e; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 141; Dio Chrys. 57 [74], 22; Arrian, Anab. 5, 21, 2; 3; Herm. Wr. 11, 12a; CPR I, 103, 21 ἀπό τε ἄλλων πρασέων ἢ ἑτέρων οἰκονομιῶν; 3, 19; 6, 17. Cp. also POxy 276, 11 σὺν ἄλλοις σιτολόγοις w. PGen 36, 10 σὺν ἑτέροις ἱερεῦσι; POslo 111, 246 μηδένα ἄλλον with ln. 292 μηδένα ἕτερον; and Mt 10:23 with v.l.; Mlt-Turner 197f): εἰς ἕ. εὐαγγέλιον ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλο to another gospel, which is no (other) gospel at all Gal 1:6f (ἄλλος 2b). For another view cp. 2 below. ἄλλον Ἰησοῦν … πνεῦμα ἕ. … εὐαγγέλιον ἕ. 2 Cor 11:4. S. also δ.

δ. In lists (Ath. 4, 1 ἕ. μὲν … ἄλλο δἐ; 26, 2 ἄλλους μὲν … ἐφʼ ἑτέρων δέ) ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον … καὶ ἕ. … καὶ ἕ. some … some etc. Lk 8:(5), 6, 7, 8. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ἄλλος δὲ … ἕτερος … ἄλλος δὲ … ἄλλος δὲ … ἕτερος … 1 Cor 12:(8), 9, 10; τὶς … ἕ. 3:4; τὶς … ἕ. … ἄλλος τις Lk 22:(56), 58, (59). πρῶτος … ἕ. 16:(5), 7; πρῶτος … και ἕ. 14:(18), 19f. ὁ πρῶτος … ὁ δεύτερος … ὁ ἕ. the first … the second … the third 19:(16, 18), 20; δοῦλος … ἕ. δοῦλος … τρίτος 20:(10), 11, (12). Pl. τινὲς … ἕτεροι 11:(15), 16. ἄλλοι … ἕ. (PParis 26, 31 [163/162 B.C.]) Hb 11:(35), 36. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕ. δὲ … Mt 16:14.

ε. ὁ ἕτερος one’s neighbor (the contrast here is w. αὐτός: Demosth. 34, 12 ἕ. ἤδη ἦν καὶ οὐχ ὁ αὐτός; cp. Is 34:14) Ro 2:1; 13:8 (WMarxsen, TZ 11, ’55, 230–37; but s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 111 n. 2); 1 Cor 6:1; 10:24, 29; 14:17; Gal 6:4. Without the article διδάσκων ἕτερον σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις; Ro 2:21 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 28, 1 K.=49 p. 491 D.: νουθετεῖν ἑτέρους ἀφέντες ἑαυτούς). Pl. Phil 2:4.

ζ. τῇ ἑτέρᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) on the next day (X., Cyr. 4, 6, 10) Ac 20:15; 27:3.—ἐν ἑτέρῳ in another place (in Scripture; cp. Jos., Ant. 14, 114; Just., D. 58, 8 ἐν ἑτέροις etc.) 13:35; Hb 5:6. εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον … ἤ Ac 17:21 (CPR I, 32, 15 οὐδὲν δὲ ἕτερον; Jos., Ant. 8, 104; Tat. 14, 2 οὐδὲν … ἕτερον ἤ).

② pert. to being dissimilar in kind or class from all other entities, another, different fr. what precedes, externally or internally (cp. Pla., Symp. 186b ἕτερος καὶ ἀνόμοιος al.; OGI 458, 8 [c. 9 B.C.] ἑτέραν ὄψιν; POxy 939, 18; Wsd 7:5; Jdth 8:20 al.; TestSol 11:3 ἑτέραν πρᾶξιν; Just., D. 6, 1 ἕ. … τι τὸ μετέχον τινὸς ἐκείνου οὗ μετέχει; 55, 1 ἕ. θεὸς παρὰ τὸν ποιητὴν τῶν ὅλων; 119, 3 ἡμεῖς λαὸς ἕ. ἀνεθήλαμεν, καὶ ἐβλαστήσαμεν στάχυες καινοί): ἐν ἑ. μορφῇ in a different form Mk 16:12 (cp. Ath. 26, 3 εἰς ἕ. σχῆμα). εἶδος ἕτερον Lk 9:29 (TestSol 15:3). ἑτέρα … δόξα, ἑτέρα … glory of one kind, … of a different kind 1 Cor 15:40. ἕ. νόμος Ro 7:23. ἑ. γνῶσις B 18:1. ἑ. ὁδός Js 2:25. ἑ. διδαχή Hs 8, 6, 5 (v.l. ξένος). On ἕ. in this sense in Gal 1:6 s. M-M. s.v. Also in the sense strange ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων through the lips of strangers 1 Cor 14:21 (cp. Is 28:11). λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις Ac 2:4 may mean either speak with different (even other than their own) tongues or speak in foreign languages (cp. Is 28:11; Sir prol. ln. 22; 1QH 4, 16). S. γλῶσσα 3.—JKElliott, ZNW 60, ’69, 140f.—Schmidt, Syn. IV 559–69. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἕτερος
19 αὐτός

αὐτός (Cret. [full] ἀϝτός GDI4976, al.), αὐτή, αὐτό (also

A αὐτόν Leg.Gort. 3.4
, al.), reflexive Pron., self:—in oblique cases used for the personal Pron., him, her, it:—with Art., ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb: freq. joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (v. infr. 10),

1 one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.11.602; reversely, body, not soul, Il.1.4; oneself, as opp. others who are less prominent, as king to subject, 6.18; Zeus to other gods, 8.4; bird to young, 2.317; man to wife and children, Od.14.265; warrior to horses, Il.2.466, or to weapons, 1.47; shepherd to herd, Od.9.167, cf. Il.1.51; Trojans to allies, 11.220; seamen to ships, 7.338: generally, whole to parts, ib. 474; so later ἡ σίδη καὶ αὐτὴ καὶ τὰ φύλλα Thphr.HP4.10.7
, cf. X.Ath.1.19, Pl.Grg. 511e, etc.; αὐτή τε Μανδάνη καὶ τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα X.Cyr.1.3.1
; αὐ. τε καὶ τὰ ποιήματα βουλόμενος ἐπιδεῖξαι Pl.R. 398a
: abs., the Master, as in the Pythag. phrase Αὐτὸς ἔφα, Lat. Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος.. ;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, Ar.Nu. 218; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν ib. 219;
ἀνοιγέτω τις δώματ'· Αὐτὸς ἔρχεται
the Master, Id.Fr. 268
, cf. Pl.Prt. 314d, Thphr.Char.2.4, Men.Sam.41: αὐ. ἀϋτεῖ Theoc.24.50
: neut., αὐτὸ σημανεῖ the result will show, E.Ph. 623; αὐτὸ δηλώσει D.19.157
; αὐτὰ δηλοῖ Pl.Prt. 329b
; αὐτὸ διδάξει ib. 324a; esp. αὐτὸ δείξει Cratin. 177
, Pl.Hp.Ma. 288b, cf. Tht. 200e; in full, τάχ' αὐτὸ δείξει τοὔργον S.Fr. 388
; τοὔργον τάχ' αὐτὸ δείξει Ar.Lys. 375
; redupl., αὐτός θ' ὁ χρήσας αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ μαρτυρῶν A.Eu. 798
; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under.., Il.13.615; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, Lys.12.12; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, X. An.4.7.7; αὐτὸ ὃ μάλιστα ἔδει ῥηθῆναι Pl.R. 362d
; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, Th.2.3; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, X.Mem. 4.5.7; αὐτὰ τὰ χρήσιμα καὶ ἀναγκαῖα D.H.Th.23
; even, οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης Il.6.451
; εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν 2.597
.—In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the Art. and Subst., or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Art. is sts. omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals, αὐτὸς Μένων X.An.2.1.5
; αὐτὸς βασιλεύς ib.1.7.11.

2 of oneself, of one's own accord, ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω Il.17.254
; σπεύδοντα καὶ αὐτὸν ὀτρύνεις 8.293
; καταπαύσομεν· οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ παυέσθων Od.2.168
; ἥξει γὰρ αὐτά S.OT 341
; also, in person, τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν.. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον D.1.2
.

3 by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.8.99; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ', i.e. without a mother, 5.880, cf. Hes.Th. 924;
ἀνακομισθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐς Φάληρον
by himself, Hdt.5.85
; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, Ar.Ach. 504, cf. Th. 472, Pl.Prm. 137b, Herod.6.70, Plu.2.755c, Luc. DDeor.10.2; αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀνδράσι.. ἢ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις X.An.2.3.7
; ἄνευ τοῦ σίτου τὸ ὄψον αὐτὸ ἐσθίειν Id.Mem.3.14.3
; τὸν τρίβωνα ὃν αὐτὸν φορεῖ Thphr.Char.22.13
(prob.); αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, Emp.21.13, al.: strengthd., αὐτὸς κτήσατο οἶος himself alone, Od.14.450; αὐτὸς μόνος, v. μόνος II; αὐτὸς καθ' αὑτόν, v. ἑαυτοῦ.

4 in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea, δίκαιον αὐτό Pl.Phd. 65d
; αὐτὸ τὸ ἕν Id.Prm. 143a
, al., cf. Arist. Metaph. 997b8: neut., αὐτό is freq. in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders, οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ' αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις Pl.R. 363a
; less freq. with Art., τί ποτ' ἐστὶν αὐτὸ ἡ ἀρετή Id.Prt. 360e
; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ οὔ; Id.Smp. 199d; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, ibid.e: later, in compos., αὐτοαγαθόν, αὐτοάνθρωπος, etc. (q. v.), cf. Arist.Metaph. 1040b33; less freq. agreeing with the Subst., ἵνα αὐτὴ δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν αὐτὴν κριθείη Pl.R. 612c
, etc.; doubled,
ἐκ τῆς εἰκόνος μανθάνειν αὐτήν τε αὐτήν, εἰ καλῶς εἴκασται
its very self, Id.Cra. 439a
.

5 in dat. with Subst., in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, Il.9.194; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all, 14.498, cf. Od.13.118; αὐτῷ σὺν ἄγγει E. Ion 32
, cf. Hipp. 1213; also without σύν, αὐτῇ κεν γαίῃ ἐρύσαι Il.8.24
: so freq. in Prose and Poetry, αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι men and all, Hdt.6.93; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, A.Pr. 223 (lyr.); αὐτοῖς μελάθροις διακναιομένους E.Med. 164
: with Art., αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι ἱματίοισι ἀπ' ὦν ἔβαψε ἑωυτόν Hdt.2.47
; αὐτοῖσι τοῖς πόρπαξι Ar.Eq. 849
, etc.; αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἵπποις κατακρημνισθῆναι X.Cyr.1.4.7
.

6 added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, Th.1.46, cf. 8.35, X.HG2.2.17, Apoc.17.11, etc.:— αὐτός always being the chief person.

7 freq. coupled with οὗτος, τοῦτ' αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν Pl.Plt. 267c
, etc.; αὐτὸ τοῦτο μόνον Id.Grg. 500b
; also λεγόντων ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν.. αὐτὰ δὲ τάδε Th.1.139
; πόλεις ἄλλας τε καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο τὸ Βυζάντιον X.An.7.1.27
; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e.

8 καὶ αὐτός himself too, Od.7.73, 14.45, X.An.5.5.9, etc.

9 repeated in apodosi for emphasis, αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν.. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν Lys.12.68
, cf. A.Fr. 350, X.An.3.2.4.

10 in connexion with the person. Pron., ἐγὼν αὐτός Od.2.194
; σέθεν αὐτοῦ Il.23.312
; νωΐτερον αὐτῶν 15.39
(always divisim in Hom.); folld. by an enclit. Pron., αὐτόν μιν Od.4.244
; so αὐτὸν γάρ σε δεῖ Προμηθέως A.Pr.86
; also αὐτὸς ἔγωγε Pl.Phd. 59b
, etc.:— after Hom. in the oblique cases αὐτός coalesces with the Pron., ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ (these not in Alc. or Sapph., A.D.Pron.80.10 sqq.), ἑαυτοῦ, etc. (q. v.).

b with person. Pron. omitted, αὐτός.. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, Il.13.252; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν, 24.503; αὐτῶν γὰρ ἀπωλόμεθ' ἀφραδίῃσιν Od.10.27
; in 2.33 οἱ αὐτῷ is simply a strengthd. form of οἱ; and so in [dialect] Att., when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc., are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. Pron., cf. X.Cyr.6.2.25 with 6.1.14.

c with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc., to add force and definiteness, αὐτὸς καθ' αὑτοῦ A.Th. 406
; αὐτοὶ ὑφ' αὑτῶν ib. 194; αὐτοὶ καθ' αὑτούς X.Mem.3.5.4
; αὐτὸ καθ' αὑτό Pl.Tht. 201e
; sts. between the Art. and reflex. Pron., τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται A.Ag. 836
, cf. Pr. 762; τούς γ' αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πολεμίους S.Aj. 1132
: also κατ' αὐτὺ ([dialect] Boeot. for αὐτοὶ) αὐτῶν IG7.3172.121
(Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.).

d αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possess. Pron., πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ' ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ Il.6.446
; θρῆνον.. ἐμὸν τὸν αὐτῆς A.Ag. 1323
; ἐχθρὸς ὢν τοῖς σοῖσιν αὐτοῦ S.OT 416
; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ ib. 1248; αὐτῶν σφετέρῃσιν ἀτασθαλίῃσιν Od.1.7
; τοῖς ἡμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις X.An. 7.1.29
.

e αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. Adj., αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος Hdt.2.25
; τῇ εὐρυτάτη ἐστὶ αὐτὴ ἑωυτῆς Id.1.203
.

11 αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, Il.12.225, Od.8.107, 16.138, Pi.N.5.1 (never in Trag.), and in later Prose, αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις IG 14.966
(ii A. D.), cf. Ev.Luc.23.12.

12 [comp] Comp. αὐτότερος Epich.5
: [comp] Sup.
αὐτότατος
his very self, Ar.Pl.83
: neut. pl. αὐτότατα dub. in Phld.Piet.80. Adv., [comp] Comp. αὐτοτέρως Gal.18(2).431
.

II he, she, it, for the simple Pron. of 3 pers., only in oblique cases (exc. in later Gk., Ev.Luc.4.15, etc.), and rarely first in a sentence, Pl.La. 194e, and later, Ep.Eph.2.10, etc.: rare in [dialect] Ep., Il. 12.204 (where Hdn. treated it as enclitic), and mostly emphatic, ib.14.457, Od.16.388; so in Trag., E.Hel. 421: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence, ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα.. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι X.An.2.4.7
; πειράσομαι τῷ πάππῳ.. συμμαχεῖν αὐτῷ Id.Cyr.1.3.15
; ἄνδρα δὴ.. εἰ ἀφίκοιτο εἰς τὴν πόλιν, προσκυνοῖμεν ἂν αὐτόν Pl.R. 398a
; after a Relative, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται.. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
; οὓς μὴ εὕρισκον, κενοτάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν X.An.6
. 4.9, cf. 1.9.29; esp. where a second Verb requires a change of case in the Pron., οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι.. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι Id.An.2.5.27
; ἐκεῖνοι οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ' οἱ λέγοντες οὐδ' ἐφίλουν αὐτούς D.3.24
; in subdivisions, ὅσοι.. οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν.. X.Cyr.1.1.1
, cf. Pl.Chrm. 168e; later, pleonastically after a Relative, ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν Call.Epigr.43
, cf. Ev.Luc.3.16, Apoc.7.2, etc.: in S.Ph. 316 αὐτοῖς is emphatic 'in their own persons'.

III with Art. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and [dialect] Att. [var] contr. αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre, cf. S.OT 734 with 325, and in Prose to avoid hiatus): gen. ταὐτοῦ, dat. ταὐτῷ, pl. neut. ταὐτά; [dialect] Ion. ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in Hom., Il. 6.391, Od.7.55, 326; ὁ αὐ. εἰμι τῇ γνώμῃ Th.3.38
, cf. 5.75; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79
: c. dat., to denote sameness or agreement, esp. in Prose, τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν Hdt.4.119
; τὸν αὐτὸν χῶρον ἐκλιπὼν ἐμοί A.Ch. 543
; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, Pl. Euthd. 298a; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with.., X.An.3.1.27; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one, ib.30, cf. A.Ch. 210; κατὰ ταὐτὰ τῷ Νείλῳ Hdt.2.20
; τῇ αὐτῇ.. καί Id.4.109
; τὴν αὐτὴν διάνοιαν καὶ κατ' ἐκείνην ἡλικίαν Isoc.5.83
; ὁ αὐτός.. ὥσπερ Pl.Phd. 86a
;
ἐς ταὐτὸν ἀλλήλοις
face to face, Jul.Or.2.5a0
.

2 in later Greek, the said, the above-named, Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ. PLille23.8
(iii B. C.), etc.

IV Adverbial phrases:

1 αὐτὸ μόνον
simply, merely, Ph. 2.252
, etc.; αὐ. μόνον ἐργάτης Luc.Somn.9
; αὐ. μόνον τὸ ὄνομα τῆς φωνῆς A.D.Synt.22.20
.

2 αὐτό as Adv., = ἄρτι, Epigr.Gr.540.1 ([place name] Thrace).

3 αὐτὸ τοῦτο as Adv., PGrenf.1.114 (ii B. C.), 2 Ep.Pet. 1.5; τῆς αὐτὸ τοῦτο κινουμένης σφαίρας Iamb. Comm.Math.17
.

4 with Preps.,
ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό
added together, making a total, PLond.2.196.37
(ii A. D.);
κατὰ τὸ αὐτό
together, at the same time, Act.Ap. 14.1
, etc.; but
κατ' αὐτό
just then, Hdn.1.12.3
.

V In Compos.:

1 of or by oneself, self-.., as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος.

2 hence, as a second self, very.., bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς.

3 in the abstract, the ideal, v. supr.1.4.

4 precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα.

5 rarely with reflex. sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω.

6 in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος.

7 by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc., v. the respective Arts.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > αὐτός
20 οὔτε

οὔτε, Adv., ([etym.] οὐ, τε) joining neg. clauses, as τε joins posit., but rare in the simple sense

A and not, Il.22.265 (v.l.), Hdt.3.155 (v.l.); οὔτε γὰρ ἐκείνους διδόναι, Lat. neque enim, Id.1.3 (prob. f.l. for οὐδὲ); and occasionally in later writers, Arist.Ph. 208a8, Luc.Par.27,53, etc.

II mostly repeated, οὔτε.., οὔτε .. neither.., nor.., Lat. neque.., neque.., Hom., etc.—Hom. freq. joins another Particle with the first or second οὔτε, as οὔτ' ἂρ.., οὔτε.. ; οὔτ' ἂρ.., οὔτ' ἂρ.. ; οὔτ' ἄρ τε.., οὔτ' ἄρα .. Il.5.89; οὔτ' οὖν, v. οὖν 1; οὔτε.. οὖν.., οὔτ' ἄρα .. 20.7; οὔτ' ἄρ.., οὔτε τι .., or οὔτε τι.., οὔτε .., 1.115, Od.1.202; so too οὔτε.., οὔτε μὴν .. X.Cyr.4.3.12; οὔτε.., οὔτ' αὖ .., v. infr. 3.

2 freq. used to divide up a general negation into two or more parts, ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται φεύγοντα διώκειν, οὔτ' ἂρ ὁ τὸν δύναται ὑποφεύγειν οὔθ' ὁ διώκειν Il.22.200
; thrice repeated, οὔ μοι Τρώων.. μέλει ἄλγος.., οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος οὔτε κασιγνήτων 6.450
; οὐκ ἔπειθεν οὔτε τοὺς στρατηγοὺς οὔτε τοὺς στρατιώτας Th.4.4
: without a neg. preceding, Il.1.490, 2.202, etc.

3 within one of the two clauses distd. by οὔτε a subordinate part may be introduced by οὐδέ, οὔτε γὰρ ἐκ σκίλλης ῥόδα φύεται οὐδ' ὑάκινθος ( οὐθ' codd.), οὐ δέ ποτ' ἐκ δούλης τέκνον ἐλευθέριον Thgn.537
; οὔτε.. ἀπέφηνεν οὐδὲ παρέσχηται μάρτυρας, οὔτ' αὖ τὸν ἀριθμὸν.. ἐπανέφερεν D.27.49
: sts. after several clauses distd. by οὔτε the last is introduced emphat. by οὐδέ, οὔτε φάρμακα οὔτε καύσεις οὔτε τομαὶ οὐδ' αὖ ἐπῳδαί nor yet incantations, Pl. R. 426b, cf. 499b (so μηδέ after clauses with μήτε, μήτε παιδεία μήτε δικαστήρια μήτε νόμοι μηδὲ ἀνάγκη μηδεμία Id.Prt. 327d
); so οὐδέ ([etym.] μηδέ) may sts. follow a single οὔτε (μήτε), οὐδέ ποτέ σφιν οὔτε τι πημανθῆναι ἔπι δέος, οὐδ' ἀπολέσθαι neither to suffer misery, nor yet to die, v. l. in Od.8.563, cf. Pi.P.8.83, I.2.44, S.OC 1139, 1141 (s.v.l.), 1297 (cj.), Pl. Ap. 19d: in many of these places, however, the readings vary, and editors have altered οὐδέ into οὔτε; but this cannot be done in some cases, as οὔτ' ἂν ὑπό γε ἑνὸς.. πάθοι, ἴσως δ' οὐδὲ ὑπὸ πλεόνων Id.La. 182b
: so when οὔτε is folld. by οὐδὲ μέν, Od.13.207; by οὐδὲ μήν, X. Cyr.4.5.27; οὐδ' αὖ, v. supr.—But οὔτε ([etym.] μήτε ) cannot be used simply answering to οὐδέ ([etym.] μηδέ), v. μηδέ A. 2.

4 οὔτε may be folld. by a Posit. clause with τε, οὔτ' αὐτὸς κτενέει, ἀπό τ' ἄλλους πάντας ἐρύξει he both will not kill and will defend, Il.24.156, cf. A.Pr. 246, 262, Hdt.5.49, X.An.7.7.48, etc.: sts. the neg. is added after the τε, οὔτ' ὦν.. καρπὸν ἔδωκαν ἄρουραι, δένδρεά τ' οὐκ ἐθέλει.. φέρειν Pi.N.11.40
, cf. S. Ant. 763, E.Hipp. 302; κυάμους δὲ οὔτε τι μάλα σπείρουσι, τούς τε γενομένους οὔτε τρώγουσι οὔτε ἕψοντες πατέονται Hdt.2.37
: the combination οὔτε.., καί .. is dub. in E.IT 591, but is found in later writers, as Luc.DMeretr.2.4, Chor.in Rev.Phil.1877.218.

5 οὔτε is freq., by anacoluthon, folld. not by a second οὔτε, but by some other Particle, as by οὐδέ, v. supr. 3; by δέ alone, Il.24.368, Hdt.1.108, Pl.R. 388e, X.An.6.3.16.

b in Poets, οὐ sts. follows without any conjunctive Particle, οὐκ ἦν ἀλέξημ' οὐδὲν οὔτε βρώσιμον, οὐ χριστόν, οὔτε πιστόν A.Pr. 479
; οὔτε πλινθυφεῖς δόμους.. ᾖσαν, οὐ ξυλουργίαν ib. 450, cf. Theoc.15.139 sq.; οὔτε βλάστας.. πατρός, οὐ μητρὸς εἶχον S.OC 972
, cf. Ant. 249, E.Or.41: so also in the Prose of Hdt., ἐς ποταμὸν οὔτε ἐνουρέουσι οὔτε ἐμπτύουσι, οὐ χεῖρας ἐναπονίζονται, οὐδέ .. 1.138.

c in Poets also οὔτε is sts. replaced by οὐ, οὐ νιφετὸς οὔτ' ἂρ χειμὼν πολὺς οὔτε ποτ' ὄμβρος Od.4.566
; οὐ γὰρ ἂν εἰδείης ἀνδρὸς νόον οὔτε γυναικός Thgn.125
(dub. l.), cf. Il.1.115, Od.9.136, A.Pers. 588 (lyr., s. v.l.), etc.

d the former οὔτε is sts. omitted, ναυσὶ δ' οὔτε πεζὸς ἰών Pi.P.10.29
; νόσοι δ' οὔτε γῆρας ib.41; Πάρις γὰρ οὔτε συντελὴς πόλις A.Ag. 532
, cf. Ch. 294; and v. μήτε 2.

6 when οὔτε and μήτε correspond, each retains its proper sense, ἀναιδὴς οὔτ' εἰμὶ μήτε γενοίμην neither am I shameless, nor may I become so, D.8.68, cf. Aeschin.3.128.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὔτε

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Second First Impression — Infobox Album | Name = Second First Impression Type = Album Artist = Daniel Bedingfield Released = 8 November, 2004 Recorded = Genre = Pop Length = 47:51 Label = Polydor Records Producer = Jack Joseph Puig Reviews = Last album = Gotta Get Thru… … Wikipedia
second-first — | ̷ ̷ ̷ ̷| ̷ ̷ adjective : of, relating to, or being the sabbath second between Passover and Pentecost and first after the beginning of the Paschal week … Useful english dictionary
First-order logic — is a formal logical system used in mathematics, philosophy, linguistics, and computer science. It goes by many names, including: first order predicate calculus, the lower predicate calculus, quantification theory, and predicate logic (a less… … Wikipedia
Second — This article is about the unit of time. For other uses, see Second (disambiguation). A light flashing approximately once per second. The second (SI unit symbol: s; informal abbreviation: sec) is a unit of measurement of time, and is the… … Wikipedia
second name — n. family name, last name, surname; person s second first name, second given name … English contemporary dictionary
Second Intifada — Part of the Israeli–Palestinian conflict and Arab–Israeli conflict Clockwise from above: A masked P … Wikipedia
Second Avenue Subway — Planned route of the NYC Subway Second Avenue Line ( T , in teal). Overview Type Rapid transit System … Wikipedia
First Bulgarian Empire — Първo българско царство Părvo Bălgarsko Tsarstvo ← … Wikipedia
Second Sino-Japanese War — Part of the Pacific War of World War II (from 1941) … Wikipedia
Second Battle of El Alamein — Part of Western Desert Campaign … Wikipedia
Second Battle of Bull Run — (Second Manassas) Part of the American Civil War … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

second-first

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

second-first

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: